JP6698620B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  As a game machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when the game medium wins a prize area such as a winning opening provided in the game area, a prize game medium such as a predetermined number of prize balls is generated. Some are paid out to players. Furthermore, a variable display device is provided which is capable of variably displaying (also referred to as “fluctuation”) identification information when a game medium wins a prize (starting condition is satisfied) in a predetermined winning area (starting winning opening). When the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result (big hit pattern), there is one that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player.

  As such a game machine, a main board (game control device) turns on an LED such as a hold indicator (such as a special-figure 1 memory display) provided in the lower right portion of the game board, and the effect control board. There is a gaming machine in which the (production control device) recognizably displays the hold memory for the variable display that has not been started yet by displaying the hold display symbol on the screen of the image display device (display device) (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2011-78825, A

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of enhancing interest.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve interest.

(A) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display,
Image display means capable of displaying effects corresponding to variable display,
Correspondence display execution means capable of executing correspondence display corresponding to variable display,
Suggestion effect execution means capable of executing suggestion effect suggesting whether or not the display mode of the correspondence display changes,
Hold storage means capable of storing information on variable display that has not been started yet as hold information,
A predetermined hold display section which is provided in the image display means and displays the hold information stored in the hold storage means;
A special hold display section which is provided outside the image display means and which displays the hold information stored in the hold storage means;
Equipped with
The execution mode of the correspondence display includes a normal mode, a special mode different from the normal mode, and a first special mode and a second special mode that are modes different from the normal mode and the special mode,
The correspondence display execution means can execute the correspondence display at a plurality of timings by changing the correspondence display to the first special mode or the second special mode in a predetermined area of the image display means ,
The display mode of the predetermined area includes a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode,
When the display mode of the predetermined area is the first mode and when the display mode of the predetermined area is the second mode, the ratio of executing the suggestive effect is different,
The suggestion effect executing means, when the correspondence display is executed in the special mode, executes the suggestion effect more frequently than when the correspondence display is not executed in the special mode,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped and restarted, the display on the special hold display unit is started earlier than the display on the predetermined hold display unit,
It is characterized in.
(B) In order to achieve the above object, another gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of executing a variable display (for example, a variable display of a special symbol or a decorative symbol),
Display means capable of displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display,
Suggestion effect execution means capable of executing suggestion effect suggesting whether or not the display mode of the correspondence display changes,
Equipped with
The display mode of the corresponding display includes a normal mode, a special mode different from the normal mode, and a first special mode and a second special mode that are modes different from the normal mode and the special mode,
It is possible to change and display the corresponding display in the first special mode or the second special mode at a plurality of timings,
The suggestion effect executing means, when the correspondence display is displayed in the special mode, executes the suggestion production more frequently than when the correspondence display is not displayed in the special mode,
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, the interest can be improved.

(1) Other gaming machines,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of executing a variable display (for example, a variable display of a special symbol or a decorative symbol),
With game control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, the CPU 103 for executing the special symbol process processing of FIG. 14),
Production control means (for example, CPU 120 for production control that executes the production control process processing of FIG. 24) that controls production based on information from the game control means (for example, production control command of FIG. 5),
Variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special drawing game, etc.) and start region (for example, the first starting winning opening 60A) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special drawing game) Distribution means (for example, a distribution member 60C or the like) for distributing the game medium to a start region (for example, the second start winning opening 60B or the like)
Information about the variable display of the first identification information that has not yet started can be stored as the first reserved storage information, and information about the variable display of the second identification information that has not yet started can be stored as the second reserved storage information. Possible hold storage means (for example, the first special figure hold storage unit 151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 151B),
The display is controlled by the game control means, and a specific hold display unit (for example, first hold display and second hold display) for displaying the first hold storage information and the second hold storage information (for example, first hold display). Hold indicator 25A and second hold indicator 25B, etc.),
An image display means capable of displaying an image (for example, the image display device 5 or the like),
The display is provided on the image display unit, and the display is controlled based on the information from the effect control unit (for example, a command according to the effect control pattern), and the display related to the first hold storage information and the second hold storage information is performed. A predetermined hold display section (for example, a first start winning prize memory display area 5HL and a second starting prize winning memory display area 5HR),
A first special hold for being provided outside the image display means (for example, refer to FIG. 1 and FIG. 2), the display is controlled based on the information from the effect control means, and a display regarding the first hold storage information is performed. A display unit (for example, the first hold indicator 51A),
A second special hold display unit (for example, a second hold display device) provided outside the image display unit, the display of which is controlled based on the information from the effect control unit, and which displays the second hold storage information. 51B),
Special image display means capable of displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display in a predetermined area of the image display means during execution of the variable display,
During the execution of the variable display, a common effect that is commonly executed when the display mode of the corresponding display is changed and when the display mode of the corresponding display is not changed, and a display mode of the corresponding display after the common effect is executed. And a performance effecting means capable of executing a success effect that does not change or a failure effect that does not change the display mode of the corresponding display,
Equipped with
Of a plurality of timings during execution of the variable display, the rate of executing the success effect is different depending on at which timing the common effect is executed.
It is characterized by
In the gaming machine of (1) above,
There are a plurality of display modes of the correspondence display, including a normal mode and a special mode different from the normal mode,
Depending on whether the display mode of the displayed correspondence is the special mode or not, the rate of change of the correspondence is different,
It is characterized by
In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The gaming machine can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
There are a plurality of types of display modes of the predetermined image defining the predetermined area,
There are multiple types of display of the correspondence display,
Depending on which of a plurality of types of display modes the predetermined image is changed to be displayed and which of a plurality of types of display modes the corresponding display is changed to be displayed, the degree of expectation to be in the advantageous state Is different,
It is characterized by
In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The first special hold display section or the second special hold display section maintains the display regarding the hold storage information when the display regarding the hold storage information by the predetermined hold display section is erased with the execution of the predetermined effect. ,
It is characterized by
In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The first special hold display section or the second special hold display section includes a plurality of light emitting means capable of light emission display,
The first special hold display section or the second special hold display section, when blinking the plurality of light emitting means, blinks the plurality of light emitting means in synchronization.
It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the recognizability of the presence or absence of the pending storage.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
During execution of the variable display, a corresponding display (for example, active display AH or active display frame AHW surrounding active display AH) corresponding to the variable display can be displayed in a predetermined area (for example, active display area AHA). A special image display means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S531),
During the execution of the variable display, a common effect that is commonly executed when the display mode of the corresponding display is changed and when the display mode of the corresponding display is not changed (for example, in the first system change effect, the graphic group Y1 is Effects before colliding with the active display, or effects until the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame surrounding the active display in the second system change effect), and a display mode of the corresponding display after executing the common effect. (For example, in the first system change effect, an effect in which a figure of one of the shapes “star” of the figure group Y1 collides with the active display to change to a star display mode, or a second system change effect) In, the effect that the line Y of the active display frame changes due to the arrow Y2 colliding with the active display frame, or both the first system change effect and the second system change effect are executed to perform the active display or the active display. Effects that change the display mode of the frame or the like or failure effects that do not change the display mode of the corresponding display (for example, in the first system change effect, the active display is collided with a graphic of any shape "star" of the graphic group Y1. In the production in which the display mode of the active display does not change before it is performed, or in the second system change production, the arrow Y2 disappears before the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame and the line thickness of the active display frame That does not change, or an effect that executes both the first system change effect and the second system change effect and does not change the display mode of one or both of the active display and the active display frame) Execution means (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control for executing an active display change effect),
Further equipped with,
Of a plurality of timings (for example, timing 1 to timing 4) during execution of the variable display, the ratio of executing the success effect is different depending on which timing the common effect is executed (for example, FIG. 31). reference),
It is characterized by

  With such a configuration, the gaming machine can focus on the execution timing of the common effect for notifying whether or not the display mode of the corresponding display changes. In addition, the gaming machine can improve the player's expectation by paying attention to the execution timing.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
Further, a predetermined effect execution unit (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for controlling the rotation and light emission of the versater writer 54) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, an effect of rotating the versa lighter 54 in front of the image display device 5) is further provided.
In the first special hold display section and the second special hold display section, when the display of the hold storage by the predetermined hold display section is erased along with the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, the first start winning prize memory display area). 5HL and the second start winning prize memory display area 5HR are hidden by the afterimage of the light emission of the LED 545A), the display of the reserved memory is maintained (for example, see FIG. 32),
It is characterized by

  According to such a configuration, even if the display of the hold storage in the image display means is erased along with the execution of the predetermined effect, the player can recognize the presence or absence of the hold storage, and the misidentification of the player can be suppressed. .. In addition, the degree of freedom of production can be improved.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The first special hold display section and the second special hold display section include a plurality of light emitting means capable of displaying light emission (for example, LEDs 51Aa, 51Ab, 51Ba, 51Bb, etc. shown in FIG. 47),
The first special hold display section and the second special hold display section, when blinking the plurality of light emitting means, blink the plurality of light emitting means in synchronization (for example, see FIG. 47),
It is characterized by

  With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the appearance while suppressing the control load.

It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an aspect of the present invention. It is a front view of a rendering unit. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure showing an example of light emission, such as a reservation indicator which a main board controls and a production control board. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example etc of contents of production control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number for games counted on the main board side. It is a figure which illustrates a variation category and a variation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a jackpot type determination table. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a data holding area for game control. It is the figure which shows the constitution example and the like of production control pattern. It is a block diagram etc. which show the structural example of the data holding area for effect control. It is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the starting winning a prize decision processing in the special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart and the like showing an example of a random number determination process at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of selection of a variation category determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a variation category determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a figure which shows the example of setting of the determination rate of a fluctuation pattern. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of command analysis processing. It is the flowchart which shows production control process treatment. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the winning a prize production decision processing in the production control process treatment. It is a figure which shows the example of setting of the determination rate of the display mode of a hold display. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the 4th design control processing in production control process processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a figure which shows the example of setting of the determination rate by the active display change production execution presence/absence determination table. It is a figure which shows the example of setting of the determination rate of the production aspect at the time of active display change production execution. It is a figure which shows the example of setting of the determination rate by the production|generation execution timing determination table at the time of 1st system change production execution. It is a front view of the effect unit when the versatilizer is rotating. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the other setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of a hold display. It is a figure which shows the other example of a setting of the determination rate by the active display change production execution presence/absence determination table. It is a figure which shows the example of setting of the determination rate by the 1st system detailed pattern determination table at the time of 1st system change production execution. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in a modification. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of light emission of a holding|maintenance indicator, a blinking timing, etc. in a modification. It is a figure which shows the blinking timing of each LED of the reservation indicator in a modification. It is a figure which shows the blinking timing of a reservation indicator and a 4th symbol indicator in a modification. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of arrangement|positioning of the reservation indicator and the 4th symbol indicator in a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of arrangement|positioning of the reservation indicator and the 4th symbol indicator in a modification.

(Embodiment)
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, showing a layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. In the game board 2, a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails is formed. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball hitting launch device and is driven into it.

  A normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided on the lower side of the game area of the game board 2. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball device 6B is an electric motor having a pair of movable blades that is changed to a normal open state in which it is in a vertical position and an expanded open state in which it is in a tilted position by a solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided, and a start area (second start area) second start winning opening is formed.

  As an example, in the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B, when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position, so that the game ball passes through (enters) the second starting winning port. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball passes through the second starting winning port by the tilting control in which the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is on. It will be in an enlarged open state that is easy to enter. Although the normal variable winning ball device 6B allows the game ball to enter the second starting winning port even when it is in the normally open state, it is possible that the game ball enters as compared to when it is in the enlarged opening state. It may be configured to be low. Alternatively, the normal variable winning prize ball device 6B may be configured so that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening by closing the second starting winning opening in the normally open state. As described above, the second starting winning opening as the second starting area is in an enlarged open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and in a normally opened state in which the game ball is difficult to pass (enter) or cannot pass (enter). Changes to.

  The game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by, for example, the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. The game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening is detected by the first start opening switch 22A and is referred to as the first starting winning. In addition, the winning when the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B is referred to as a second starting winning.

  A predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls based on the fact that the game balls that have passed through (entered) the first start winning opening are detected by the first start opening switch 22A (based on the occurrence of the first start winning prize). Is paid out as a prize ball, and if the first special figure reserved storage number (described later) is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), the first special symbol game executed on the first special symbol display device 4A. A first start condition (also referred to as a first execution condition) for executing a variable display game (described later) or a variable display of a decorative pattern (described later) executed on the image display device 5 is established. In addition, based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening is detected by the second start opening switch 22B (based on the occurrence of the second starting winning opening), a predetermined number (for example, 3) While the game ball is paid out as a prize ball, if the second special figure reservation storage number (described later) is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), the second special symbol display device 4B is executed. A second start condition (also referred to as a second execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as a variable game (described later) of a decorative pattern executed on the image game (described later) or the image display device 5 is established. The number of award balls paid out based on the first starting prize and the number of award balls paid out based on the second starting prize may be the same or different from each other. Good.

  The first special figure reserved memory number (also referred to as the first reserved memory number or the number of the first reserved memory) is a variable display game in which the execution is temporarily suspended without being executed immediately when the first start prize is generated ( This is the number of variable display games due to the occurrence of the first start prize. Even if the first start condition for executing the variable display game such as the first special figure game (described later) or the variable display of decorative symbols (described later) is satisfied due to the occurrence of the first start prize, the first start When the first start condition that allows the start of the above-described variable display game due to the occurrence of a prize is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition that has been satisfied first is being executed). That is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is suspended (the variable display game is in a waiting state). That is, the number of first special figure reservation storages is the number of variable display games due to the occurrence of the first start winning awaiting execution. The number of the 1st special figure reservation storage decreases one by one whenever one 1st start condition is materialized.

  It should be noted that the variable display corresponding to the first start winning is satisfied, although the first start condition for the certain first starting prize is satisfied, but the first start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game by the first starting prize is not satisfied. The information regarding (1) is stored (held) as hold data (first special figure hold information) until the first start condition that allows the start of the variable display game by the first start winning is satisfied. That is, the first special figure game (variable display) that has not been started is stored as the first pending storage until the first start condition is satisfied. In other words, the held first special figure suspension information is consumed one by one each time the first start condition is satisfied, and the variable display game is executed based on the digested first special figure suspension information.

  The second special figure reserved memory number (also referred to as the second reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number) is a variable display game in which the execution is temporarily suspended without being executed immediately when the second start prize is generated ( It is the number of variable display games due to the occurrence of the second start winning). Even if the second start condition for executing the variable display game such as the second special figure game (described later) or the variable display of decorative symbols (described later) is satisfied by the occurrence of the second start winning, the second start is performed. When the second start condition that allows the start of the above-described variable display game due to the occurrence of a prize is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition that was previously satisfied is being executed). That is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is suspended (the variable display game is in a waiting state). That is, the second special figure reservation storage number is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the second start winning in the execution waiting state. The second special figure reservation storage number is decreased by one each time one second start condition is satisfied.

  It should be noted that the variable display corresponding to the second start prize is satisfied, although the second start condition for the certain second start prize is satisfied, but the second start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game by the second start prize is not satisfied. The information on (1) is stored (held) as suspension data (second special figure suspension information) until the second start condition for permitting the start of the variable display game by the second start winning is satisfied. That is, the second special figure game (variable display) that has not been started is stored as the second hold memory until the second start condition is satisfied. In other words, the held second special figure suspension information is consumed one by one each time the second start condition is satisfied, and the variable display game is executed based on the digested second special figure suspension information.

  In addition, when the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as “starting winning opening”. In addition, when the first starting prize and the second starting prize are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as “starting prize”. Further, the number of reserved storages obtained by adding the number of first special figure reserved memories and the number of second special figure reserved memories is referred to as "total number of reserved memories". When the first special figure reservation storage number, the second special figure reservation storage number, and the total reservation storage number are not particularly distinguished, they are usually simply referred to as "special figure reservation storage number". When referred to as the “memory number”, it may refer to any one or two of the first special figure reserved storage number, the second special figure reserved storage number, and the total reserved storage number. Further, when the first starting condition and the second starting condition are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as “starting condition” or “execution condition”. Further, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as “start condition”. In addition, the first special figure reservation information and the second special figure reservation information are simply referred to as “special figure reservation information” unless particularly distinguished.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in a lower portion of the game area of the game board 2 (below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B). The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door shown in FIG. 3, and the specific area is changed to an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. To form a big prize hole.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is in the OFF state, the special winning opening door closes the special winning opening, and the game ball passes through (enters) the special winning opening. Disable it. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is in the on state, the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening, and the game ball passes through (enters) the special winning opening. ) Make it easier. In this way, the special winning opening as a specific area changes between an open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous for the player, and a closed state where the game ball cannot pass (entry) and is disadvantageous to the player. To do. Instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) the special winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) the special winning opening may be provided.

  The game ball that has passed (entered) the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is detected by the count switch 23 shown in FIG. 3, for example. Based on the detection of the game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening which has been opened in the special variable winning ball device 7, for example, the other starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the other winning opening are played by the playing ball. More prize balls will be paid out than when you pass (enter). Therefore, if the special winning opening is opened in the special variable winning ball device 7, the game ball can enter the special winning opening, which is the first state advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed, it is impossible or difficult to get the winning ball by passing (entering) the game ball into the special winning opening. The second state is disadvantageous for the person.

  The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are provided on the right side of the game area on the game board 2. The first special symbol display device 4A is composed of, for example, a 7-segment or dot matrix LED (light emitting diode) or the like. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. The first special symbol display device 4A variably displays (variable display) a special symbol (also referred to as "special symbol") that is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) capable of identifying each. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. The special symbols (special symbols) that are variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols (special symbols) that are variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are " It is also referred to as "second special view". A game executed with variable display of identification information (or variable display of identification information itself) is referred to as a variable display game. In particular, the variable display game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A (variable display game for variably displaying the first special symbol) is also called a first special symbol game, and the variable display game executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. The (variable display game for variably displaying the second special figure) is also referred to as a second special figure game. Further, when the first special figure game and the second special figure game are not distinguished from each other, they are simply referred to as “special figure game”.

  The first special symbol display device 4A (similarly to the second special symbol display device 4B) includes a plurality of types of numbers including "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-" as a special figure game. Variable display of special symbols. A symbol number corresponding to each special symbol is attached to each special symbol. As an example, each of the numbers indicating "0" to "9" is given a symbol number of "0" to "9", and the symbol of "-" is given a symbol number of "10". Good. In addition, the special symbol is not limited to the one configured from a number indicating “0” to “9”, a symbol indicating “−”, and the like. For example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns (for example, a lighting pattern such as the alphabet L or E) in which the combination of turning on and turning off the 7-segment LED are different are set in advance, and as special symbols. It may be displayed.

  On the right side of the game area on the game board 2 (the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B), the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B (specific hold display section ) Is provided. The first hold indicator 25A is configured to include, for example, four LEDs. On the first hold indicator 25A, the first special figure hold storage number (the first special figure game hold number) based on the hold data (first special figure hold information) is displayed in a identifiable manner (the first hold memory is displayed). Yes) The first hold display is performed. For example, the 1st reservation indicator 25A displays the 1st special figure reservation memory number so that specification is possible by the number of LEDs to light. For example, when the number of holdings of the first special figure game is increased by one by the establishment of the new first starting condition, the number of lights is increased by one, and the holding of the first special figure game is held by the establishment of the new first starting condition. If the number of lights decreases by one, the number of lights may be decreased by one. The second hold indicator 25B is configured to include, for example, four LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold storage number (the second special figure game hold number) based on the hold data (second special figure hold information) in a identifiable manner (displays the second hold memory). The second hold display is performed. For example, the second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold storage number in a identifiable manner by the number of LEDs to be turned on. For example, when the number of holding the second special figure game is increased by one by the establishment of the new second starting condition, the number of lights is increased by one, and the second special figure game is held by the establishment of the new second starting condition. If the number of lights decreases by one, the number of lights may be decreased by one.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B are provided on the right side of the game area on the game board 2, but the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25A are provided. The position of the hold indicator 25B is not limited to the right part of the game area. The positions of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B may be, for example, an upper portion, a lower portion, a left portion, a corner portion of the game area, a predetermined portion of the gaming machine frame 3, or the like. Further, for example, the LED for performing the hold display (the LEDs forming the first hold display 25A and the second hold display 25B) is different from the LED (for example, an LED for notifying an error). It may be arranged (adjacent to). In such a model (type of pachinko gaming machine 1), it is difficult to identify which LED is for the hold display at a glance. In this way, the first hold display device 25A and the second hold display device 25B are located away from the center of the game area where the image display device 5 and the like are provided, and positions that are confused by other display devices (LEDs). Since it is provided in the, the visibility is low and it is difficult for the player to pay attention. On the other hand, the first hold indicator 51A and the second hold indicator 51B, which will be described later, are provided at positions close to the image display device 5 and the like, and therefore have high visibility and are easily noticed by the player. ..

  On the left side of the game area on the game board 2, there are provided a passage gate 41, a normal symbol display device 20, and a universal symbol reservation display device 25C. The game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by, for example, the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21, if the number of ordinary figure holding storages (described later) is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), the normal symbol display 20 The universal figure starting condition for executing the universal figure game (described later) executed in 1 is satisfied.

  The normal symbol display device 20 is composed of 7-segment or dot-matrix LEDs and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The normal symbol display device 20 variably displays (variable display) a normal symbol (also referred to as "general symbol" or "ordinary symbol") that is a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. The variable display game in which the normal symbols are variably displayed is also referred to as a normal figure game (or “normal figure game”). Note that information related to a universal figure game in which the universal figure start condition is satisfied but the universal figure start condition (described later) is not stored is stored (held) as suspension data (general diagram suspension information).

  The general-drawing reservation display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored general-drawing reservations based on the reservation data (universal figure reservation information), for example, by the number of LEDs to be turned on. The number of ordinary figure holding storages is the number of ordinary figure games which are not executed immediately when the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 and whose execution is temporarily held. Even if the universal figure starting condition for executing the universal figure game is satisfied by the detection of the game ball by the gate switch 21, if the universal figure starting condition for permitting the start of the universal figure game is not established ( For example, when the previously established universal figure game is being executed), the execution of the relevant universal figure game is suspended (the relevant universal figure game is in a waiting state). That is, the number of public figure reservation storages is the number of game of the general figure game which is in the state of waiting for execution. The number of stored universal figure reservations decreases by one each time one universal figure start condition is satisfied.

  An effect unit 50 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The effect unit 50 is attached to the game board 2. FIG. 2 is a front view of the rendering unit 50. The rendering unit 50 includes the image display device 5, an information display unit 51, a second lamp 52, a drive mechanism 53, and a versarizer 54.

  The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 5, a decorative pattern display area is arranged. In the decorative pattern display area, a decorative pattern, which is a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) capable of identifying each, is variably displayed. The variable display of the decoration identification information (decorative pattern) is also included in the variable display game. The image display device 5, the first special symbol game (special diagram game using the first special symbol) executed by the first special symbol display device 4A, or the second special symbol executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. Corresponding to the game (special figure game using the second special figure), a variable display of a plurality of types of decorative designs is executed in the display area (decorative design display area).

  As an example, as shown in FIG. 1, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. Corresponding to the start of any special figure game of the first special figure game or the second special figure game, that is, corresponding to the start of fluctuation of any special figure of the first special figure or the second special figure Then, in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation of the decorative symbol (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. Then, in response to the end of the special drawing game, that is, in response to the stop display of the special drawing, in each of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, the decorative design that becomes the variable display result (the final design, the final design) (Also referred to as a stop symbol) is stopped and displayed. That is, in the display area (decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R) of the image display device 5, the variation of the decorative design is started in association with (corresponding to) the first special figure game (or the second special figure game). The fixed decorative design (also called the final stop design) is stopped and displayed.

  The decorative pattern is, for example, 8 types of patterns (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese numerals, English characters, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters or symbols and character images). The character image may be, for example, a decoration image showing a person, an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or any other figure). A symbol number corresponding to each decorative pattern is attached to each decorative pattern. As an example, each alphanumeric character indicating "1" to "8" may be attached with each symbol number "1" to "8". Note that the decorative patterns are not limited to eight types, and may be of any type (eg, seven types or nine types) as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a big hit combination and a lost combination can be configured.

  The variable display result of the special symbol (also referred to as the special symbol display result) is displayed to stop the final display of the fixed special symbol and the variable display result of the decorative symbol to be the fixed decorative symbol (final stop). Stop display to stop the variable display and stop the variable display, or stop display to stop the fixed normal symbol that is the variable display result of the normal symbol (also referred to as the general display result) and end the variable display. It is also referred to as a complete stop display, a final stop display, or a derived display (or simply “derived”). The variation start timing and variation end timing of the decorative symbol do not necessarily have to match the variation start timing and variation end timing of the special symbol, and within the variation time of the special symbol (special symbol variation time), It suffices if the change time is within the range.

  That is, the variation start timing of the decorative symbol may be later than the variation start timing of the special symbol, and the variation end timing of the special symbol (stop display timing of the fixed special symbol) is the variation end timing of the decorative symbol (of the fixed symbol It may be later than the stop display timing). For example, the execution of the predetermined effect may be started after the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the fixed special symbol may be stopped and displayed at the end of the execution of the predetermined effect. An example of the predetermined effect is a simple hold effect (described later) that is one mode of the hold effect (described later).

  Further, a stop display different from the complete stop display (final stop display, derived display) may be displayed. For example, the decorative design may be temporarily stopped and displayed during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the derivation display of the fixed decorative design. In the temporary stop display, a decorative pattern whose fluctuation speed is “0” is displayed for a while, for example, while slightly shaking or expanding/contracting, or is shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). It includes things such as a stop display that does not cause time, slight shaking or stretching.

  Further, in the display area of the image display device 5, a first starting prize winning memory display area 5HL and a second starting winning prize memory display area 5HR (predetermined hold display section) are arranged. In the first start winning a prize memory display area 5HL, similarly to the first hold indicator 25A, the first special figure hold storage number (the number of the first special figure games which are currently held for execution) is identifiable and displayed ( (Display 1st hold storage) The 1st hold display is performed. In the second start winning a prize memory display area 5HR, similarly to the second hold indicator 25B, the number of the second special figure reserved memories (the number of the second special figure games whose execution is currently held) can be displayed in an identifiable manner ( (Display second hold storage) A second hold display is performed.

  In the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL, the first hold display may be performed, for example, right-justified. That is, when the number of holdings of the first special figure game is increased due to the establishment of the new first starting condition, if there is no other first holding display in the first starting winning prize memory display area 5HL, the first starting winning prize memory display is displayed. On the right side of the area 5HL (the center side of the display area of the image display device 5), a new first hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the increased first special figure hold information, and the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL is added. If there is another first hold display in the above, the new first hold is displayed on the left side of the other first hold display (if there are a plurality of other first hold displays, further left side of the leftmost first hold display). You may make it add a display. Further, when there are a plurality of first hold indications in the first start winning a prize memory display area 5HL and the hold number of the first special figure game decreases due to the establishment of the new first start condition, the first amount of decrease The first hold display (the first hold display that has been displayed from the oldest) displayed on the rightmost side of the first start prize winning memory display area 5HL corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special figure hold information is erased, Each of the other first hold displays is moved (shifted) to the erased first hold display side (right side).

  Further, in the second starting prize winning memory display area 5HR, for example, the second hold display may be performed in a left-justified manner. That is, when the number of holdings of the second special figure game increases due to the establishment of the new second starting condition, if there is no other second holding display in the second starting winning prize memory display area 5HR, the second starting winning prize memory display is displayed. A new second hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the increased second special figure hold information on the left side of the area 5HR (the center side of the display area of the image display device 5), and the second start winning a prize memory display area 5HR is added. If there is another second hold display in the above, the new second hold is displayed on the right side of the other second hold display (if there are a plurality of other second hold displays, further to the right of the rightmost second hold display). You may make it add a display.

  Further, when there are a plurality of second hold indications in the second start winning a prize memory display area 5HR and the hold number of the second special figure game decreases due to the establishment of the new second start condition, the second decrease Erase the second hold display (the second hold display that has been displayed from the oldest) displayed on the leftmost side of the second start prize winning memory display area 5HR corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special figure hold information, Each of the other second hold displays is moved (shifted) to the erased second hold display side (left side). In addition, when the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL and the second starting prize winning memory display area 5HR are not particularly distinguished, they are simply referred to as "starting prize memory display area 5H".

  Further, in the display area of the image display device 5, in addition to the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL and the second starting prize winning memory display area 5HR, an active display area AHA (active display area, active display portion, current display area, This time display area, current time display area, time-out display area, time-out display area, time-out display area, etc.) are also arranged. The active display area AHA is provided, for example, between the first starting prize winning memory display area 5HL and the second starting winning prize memory display area 5HR. In the active display area AHA, when the variable display is being executed, a special image (corresponding display) corresponding to the variable display is displayed. As an example, when the hold state of the first special figure game is released and variable display of decorative symbols is executed, the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved from the starting winning prize memory display area 5HL to the active display area AHA. And display it as a special image. In addition, when the hold state of the second special figure game is released and variable display of decorative symbols is executed, the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved from the starting winning memory display area 5HR to the active display area AHA. And display it as a special image.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the active display area AHA is arranged between the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL and the second starting winning prize memory display area 5HR. The active display area AHA may be arranged at any position in the display area of the image display device 5. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the special image includes an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed, an active display frame surrounding the active display, and the like. Note that the special image is composed of only active display and may not include an active display frame or the like.

  The information display section 51 is provided on the center decoration near the upper side of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. The information display unit 51 is a decoration of the image display device 5 and displays predetermined information so that the player can be easily informed of the progress of the game. The information display unit 51 may be provided near the lower side, near the right side, near the left side of the image display device 5, or at a plurality of positions of these. Further, the information display unit 51 may be provided so as to surround the image display device 5.

  The information display unit 51 includes a first hold display unit 51A (first special hold display unit), a second hold display unit 51B (second special hold display unit), a character display unit 51C, a fourth symbol display unit 51D (variable display). It is provided with a corresponding light emitting part), a fourth symbol display 51E (light emitting part corresponding to variable display) and a display substrate 51K. As shown in FIG. 2(B), the first hold indicator 51A, the second hold indicator 51B, the character indicator 51C, the fourth symbol indicator 51D and the fourth symbol indicator 51E are provided on the display substrate 51K. ing. That is, the first hold indicator 51A, the second hold indicator 51B, the character indicator 51C, the fourth symbol indicator 51D and the fourth symbol indicator 51E are arranged on a common substrate. In addition, at least the first reserved display 51A, the second reserved display 51B, the fourth symbol display 51D and the fourth symbol display 51E may be arranged on a common substrate. Further, the first reservation display 51A and the fourth design display 51D and the second reservation display 51B and the fourth design display 51E are arranged on different substrates, and the first reservation display 51A and the fourth design display. 51D and 51D may be arranged on a common substrate, and the second reserved display device 51B and the fourth symbol display device 51E may be arranged on a common substrate. Alternatively, the first reservation indicator 51A and the second reservation indicator 51B and the fourth symbol display 51D and the fourth symbol indicator 51E are arranged on different substrates, and the first reservation indicator 51A and the second reservation indicator 51B and 51B are arranged on a common substrate, and the fourth symbol display device 51D and the fourth symbol display device 51E may be arranged on a common substrate.

  The first hold indicator 51A is configured to include the same number of LEDs as the upper limit value of the first special figure hold storage number, for example, four LEDs 51Aa to 51Ad. On the first hold indicator 51A, similarly to the first hold indicator 25A and the first starting prize winning memory display area 5HL, the first special figure reserved memory number (the number of the first special figure game reserved) is identifiable and displayed ( (Display 1st hold storage) The 1st hold display is performed. As an example, the four LEDs 51Aa to 51Ad forming the first hold indicator 51A are arranged vertically in a row from the bottom, such as the LED 51Aa, the LED 51Ab, the LED 51Ac, and the LED 51Ad. The first hold indicator 51A displays the first special figure hold storage number according to the number of LEDs 51Aa to 51Ad that are turned on. For example, when the first special figure reservation storage number is "0", all the LEDs 51Aa to 51Ad are turned off. When the first special figure reservation storage number is "1", only the LED 51Aa is turned on, and when the first special figure reservation storage number is "2", the LEDs 51Aa and LED51Ab are turned on as shown in FIG. 2(A). To do. When the number of 1st special figure reservation memory is "3", LED51Aa, LED51Ab, and LED51Ac light, and when the number of 1st special figure reservation memory is "4", all LEDs 51Aa-51Ad light.

  The second hold indicator 51B is configured to include the same number of LEDs as the upper limit value of the second special figure hold storage number, for example, four LEDs 51Ba to 51Bd. On the second hold indicator 51B, similarly to the second hold indicator 25B and the second starting prize winning memory display area 5HR, the second special figure reserved memory number (the number of second special figure game reserved) can be displayed in an identifiable manner ( (Display second hold storage) A second hold display is performed. As an example, the four LEDs 51Ba to 51Bd forming the second hold indicator 51B are arranged vertically in a row in the order of the LED 51Ba, the LED 51Bb, the LED 51Bc, and the LED 51Bd from the bottom. The 2nd reservation indicator 51B displays the 2nd special figure reservation memory number according to the lighting number of LED51Ba-51Bd. For example, when the second special figure reservation storage number is “0”, all the LEDs 51Ba to 51Bd are turned off as shown in FIG. When the second special figure reservation storage number is "1", only the LED 51Ba is turned on, and when the second special figure reservation storage number is "2", the LEDs 51Ba and LED51Bb are turned on. When the second special figure reservation storage number is "3", the LEDs 51Ba, LED51Bb and LED51Bc are turned on, and when the second special figure reservation storage number is "4", all the LEDs 51Ba to 51Bd are turned on.

  It should be noted that the LEDs 51Aa to 51Ad of the first hold indicator 51A and the LEDs 51Ba to 51Bd of the second hold indicator 51B are not in a vertical row but in a horizontal row or a diagonal row, or in a vertical, horizontal or diagonal row. Etc. The order of arrangement of the LEDs 51Aa to 51Ad of the first hold indicator 51A and the LEDs 51Ba to 51Bd of the second hold indicator 51B may be opposite to the above order.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the first hold indicator 51A and the second hold indicator 51B are located closer to the image display device 5 than the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B. It is provided in. That is, the distance between the image display device 5 and the first hold indicator 51A and the second hold indicator 51B is the distance between the image display device 5 and the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B. It is shorter than.

  The character display unit 51C displays, for example, a current game situation, game description, and the like in a character string (message or the like), and is configured to include a plurality of LEDs arranged in a matrix, for example. .. The character display device 51C displays characters by, for example, a lighted LED and a non-lighted LED. The character display 51C is a character if the LED is an LED that can emit light in a plurality of colors (for example, an LED lamp (LED element) including RGB (red, green, blue) diodes, etc., hereinafter also referred to as a multi-color LED). Are displayed in color. The letters include numbers and symbols. The character display 51C displays various information such as super reach and big hit game state. Depending on the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, what should be hit right or what should be left (display of the firing direction) may be displayed. The character display 51C may be a display type display such as a liquid crystal display.

  The fourth symbol display device 51D is composed of LEDs (here, multi-color LEDs) and the like. The fourth symbol display device 51D blinks (may be lit) in a predetermined color (for example, red) when the first special figure game is being executed. In this way, the fourth symbol display device 51D displays the fourth symbol (here, it is represented by blinking a predetermined color of the LED) indicating that the first special figure game is being executed. At the timing when the variable display result of the first special figure game is derived, the color may be turned on in a color corresponding to the variable display result (for example, red for "big hit", black for "miss"). Further, the fourth symbol display device 51D is lit in a predetermined color (for example, red) when being controlled to a big hit game state based on that the variable display result of the first special figure game is "big hit". It may be blinking. Further, the fourth symbol display device 51D is composed of a plurality of LEDs, a liquid crystal display, etc., and the fourth symbol display device 51D is a variable display of predetermined identification information as the display of the fourth symbol (for example, "○" (circle)) And "x" (X) are alternately displayed).

  The fourth symbol display device 51E is composed of LEDs (here, multi-color LEDs) and the like. The fourth symbol display device 51E blinks (may be lit) in a predetermined color (for example, blue) when the second special figure game is being executed. In this way, the fourth symbol display device 51E displays the fourth symbol (here, it is represented by blinking a predetermined color of the LED) indicating that the second special figure game is being executed. At the timing when the variable display result of the second special figure game is derived, the color may be turned on in a color corresponding to the variable display result (for example, blue for "big hit" and black for "miss"). Further, the fourth symbol display device 51E is lit in a predetermined color (for example, blue) when being controlled to the jackpot gaming state based on the fact that the variable display result of the second special figure game is "big hit". It may be blinking. Further, the fourth symbol display device 51E is composed of a plurality of LEDs, a liquid crystal display, etc., and the fourth symbol display device 51E is a variable display of predetermined identification information as a display of the fourth symbol (for example, "○" (circle)). And "x" (X) are alternately displayed).

  The second lamp 52 is provided above the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. The second lamp 52 includes a cover member having a shape such as a character string, a plurality of LEDs (here, multi-color LEDs), and the like. The second lamp 52 is a decoration of the image display device 5 and emits light in accordance with a predetermined effect. The second lamp 52 may be provided on the lower side, the right side, or the left side of the image display device 5, or at a plurality of positions of these. The second lamp 52 may be provided so as to surround the image display device 5.

  The drive mechanism 53 is provided on the back surface of the second lamp 52. The drive mechanism 53 is composed of a stepping motor, a gear, an arm, etc., and moves the versa writer 54 downward to advance to the front surface of the image display device 5, rotates the versa writer 54, or moves the versa writer 54 upward. It may be retracted from the front of the image display device 5.

  The versa writer 54 is provided on the back surface of the second lamp 52. The versa writer 54 includes an LED group 545. The LED group 545 includes a plurality of LEDs 545A (here, multi-color LEDs) arranged in a line. At the time of executing a predetermined effect, the versa lighter 54 moves downward from the state hidden behind the second lamp 52 by the drive mechanism 53 to advance to the front of the image display device 5, and thereafter, by the drive mechanism 53. Rotate in front of. Then, at the end of the predetermined effect, the versa writer 54 moves upward by the drive mechanism 53 to retract from the front surface of the image display device 5, and stops the rotation by the drive mechanism 53. For example, by causing the LED 545A to emit light in a predetermined light emission pattern (a pattern such as a light emission color, a change timing of the light emission color, a timing of turning on and off the light) while the versa lighter 54 is rotating, a character or a character is generated by a light afterimage (also referred to as a light emission afterimage). Various displays such as figures can be displayed.

  Here, the hold indicator in this embodiment (first hold indicator 25A, second hold indicator 25B, first hold indicator 51A, second hold indicator 51B) and the fourth symbol display (fourth symbol) An example of light emission of the display 51D and the fourth symbol display 51E) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 4(A) is a main display 11 (specifically, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100), which will be described later, controls the hold indicators (first hold indicator 25A, second hold indicator 25B) to emit light. Here is an example: As shown in FIG. 4(A), when the first special display game 25A is in the "holding" state in which the first special figure game is on hold, the number of lights corresponding to the first special figure holding storage number is changed as the light emission mode. The LED is in a red lighting state in which the LED lights in red. For example, when the first special figure reservation storage number is "1", one LED lights up in red, and when the first special figure reservation storage number is "2", two LEDs light up in red. If the first special figure reservation storage number is "3", three LEDs are lit in red, and if the first special figure reservation storage number is "4", four LEDs are in red To do. It should be noted that the LEDs other than the LEDs that light up in red are extinguished as an example. Further, the first hold indicator 25A is in a light-off state in which all the LEDs are turned off as a light emission mode when the first special figure game is not held “no hold”.

  When the second special figure game is on hold, the second hold indicator 25B emits blue light in which the number of LEDs corresponding to the second special figure hold storage number is blue, as a light emission mode. It becomes a state. For example, when the second special figure reservation storage number is "1", one LED lights up in blue, and when the second special figure reservation storage number is "2", two LEDs light up in blue. If the number of the second special figure reservation storage is “3”, three LEDs are lit in blue, and if the number of the second special figure reservation storage is “4”, four LEDs are lit in blue. To do. It should be noted that the LEDs other than the LEDs that turn on blue are extinguished as an example. In addition, the second hold indicator 25B is in a light-off state in which all the LEDs are turned off as a light emission mode when the second special figure game is not held “no hold”.

  FIG. 4(B) shows an example of light emission of the hold indicator (first hold indicator 51A, second hold indicator 51B) controlled by the effect control board 12 (specifically, the CPU 120 for effect control) described later. .. As shown in FIG. 4(B), the first hold indicator 51A has a number corresponding to the number of the first special figure hold storages as a light emitting mode when the "hold hold" is present in which the first special figure game is held. The LED is in a red lighting state in which the LED lights in red. For example, when the first special figure reservation storage number is “1”, one LED 51Aa lights in red, and when the first special figure reservation storage number is “2”, the two LEDs 51Aa and 51Ab are red. When the first special figure reservation storage number is "3", the three LEDs 51Aa to 51Ac are turned on in red, and when the first special figure reservation storage number is "4", the four LEDs 51Aa ~51Ad lights in red. It should be noted that the LEDs other than the LEDs that light up in red are off as an example. Further, the first hold indicator 51A is in a light-off state in which all the LEDs are turned off as a light emitting mode when the first special figure game is not held “no hold”.

  Further, the second hold indicator 51B lights up in blue when the number of LEDs corresponding to the number of the second special figure hold storage is lighted in blue as a light emitting mode when "holding" in which the second special figure game is held. It becomes a state. For example, when the second special figure reservation storage number is "1", one LED 51Ba lights up in blue, and when the second special figure reservation storage number is "2", the two LEDs 51Ba, 51Bb are blue When the second special figure reservation storage number is “3”, the three LEDs 51Ba to 51c are lit in blue, and when the second special figure reservation storage number is “4”, the four LEDs 51Ba ~51d lights up in blue. It should be noted that the LEDs other than the LEDs that turn on blue are extinguished as an example. Further, the second hold indicator 51B is in a light-off state in which all the LEDs 51Ba to 51d are turned off as a light emitting mode when the second special figure game is not held “no hold”.

  FIG. 4(C) is a light emission example of a fourth symbol display device (fourth symbol display device 51D, fourth symbol display device 51E) controlled by a production control board 12 (specifically, the CPU 120 for production control) described later. Indicates. As shown in FIG. 4(C), the fourth symbol display device 51D displays the fourth symbol display device 51D as the light emission mode when the "first special symbol fluctuation is in progress" during execution of the first special symbol game. The constituent LEDs are in a red blinking state in which the LED blinks in red. Further, the fourth symbol display device 51D is in a big hit game state after the execution of the first special figure game, "when the first special figure big hit", the LED constituting the fourth symbol display device 51D lights in red. Red lights up. The fourth symbol display device 51D is turned off when the LEDs constituting the fourth symbol display device 51D are extinguished as a light emitting mode, except when the "first special symbol is changing" and the "first special symbol big hit". It becomes a state.

  In addition, the 4th symbol indicator 51E, in the midst of the fact that the 2nd special figure game is being executed, “while the 2nd special figure is changing”, the LED which forms 4th symbol indicator 51E blinks in blue as a luminous aspect. Flashes blue. Further, the fourth symbol display device 51E is in a big hit game state after the execution of the second special figure game, "when the second special figure big hit", the LED constituting the fourth symbol display device 51E lights up in blue. The light turns on in blue. In addition, the 4th symbol display device 51E is extinguished when the LEDs constituting the 4th symbol display device 51E are extinguished as a light emitting mode, except for the above-mentioned "during the second special map change" and "the second special map big hit It becomes a state.

  In addition to the above configuration, the game area of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball. Further, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the big winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as prize balls based on the fact that the game balls that have entered any of the general winning openings are detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball as a game medium toward a game area is provided. For example, the hit ball operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hit ball operation handle may be provided with a single-shot launch switch for stopping the drive of the launch motor included in the ball launch device, and a touch ring (touch sensor).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball striking device. The upper plate (striking ball supply plate) is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so that they can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  A stick controller 31A that can be held by a player and tilted is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, a central portion of the lower plate). There is. The stick controller 31A includes an operation rod held by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation rod (for example, a position where the index finger of the operating hand is applied when the player holds the operation rod). There is. The trigger button can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a push/pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 31A with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). It may be configured as follows. It suffices that a trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push/pull operation with respect to the trigger button is built in the operation rod.

  A tilting direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate below the stick controller 31A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit is two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) that are arranged parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operating rod when viewed from the side of the player who faces the pachinko gaming machine 1. Pair) and four transmission type photosensors (vertical sensor pair) that are arranged on the right side of the center position of the operating rod as viewed from the player side and are arranged perpendicularly to the board surface of the game board 2. It may be configured to include a photo sensor.

  As a member forming the upper plate, for example, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 31A). It is provided. The push button 31B may be configured to be capable of mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detecting a predetermined instruction operation, such as a pressing operation by the player. A push sensor for detecting a player's operation performed on the push button 31B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 31B.

  A sound output member is provided in the periphery of the game area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the speakers 8L and 8R are installed at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3. Hereinafter, the speakers 8</b>L and 8</b>R will be simply referred to as the speakers 8 unless otherwise distinguished. The speaker 8 outputs (reproduces) voice (sound and voice). For example, the speaker 8 outputs an effect sound (also referred to as a sound effect) according to the progress status of the game of the gaming machine 1, and outputs a warning sound according to the status of the gaming machine 1.

  The effect sound includes music, detection sound, response sound, notification sound, and the like. The music in the effect sound is, for example, BGM or a song that is output according to the progress of the game. The detection sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound, a voice (serif, message) or the like that is output according to the detection result of the switch or the sensor (for example, the detection of the winning of the first starting winning opening or the like). The response sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound, a voice, or the like that is output according to an operation action on the push button 31B. In addition, since the operation act on the push button 31B is also detected by the push sensor, the response sound output according to the operation act on the push button 31B is also a detection sound. The notification sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound to notify to request an operation of the push button 31B, a voice, or a sound or voice to notify that the reach state (to be described later) is to be entered. , A sound, a voice, or the like that gives a notice or suggests that the jackpot gaming state will be entered before the jackpot gaming state is entered.

  An example of the warning sound is a warning sound output when the game ball is excessively held (stored) in the lower plate, a warning sound output when the glass door (not shown) is open, and the like. .

  A first lamp 9 for a game effect is provided in the periphery of the game area of the gaming machine frame 3. The first lamp 9 is configured to include a plurality of multi-color LEDs (may be single-color LEDs). Although the plurality of first lamps 9 are actually provided, they will be described below as one. The configuration of each of the plurality of first lamps 9 is arbitrary, and each may be the same or different.

  The image display device 5, the speaker 8, the first lamp 9, and the like described above are effect devices that perform effects, but the gaming machine 1 is provided with other effect devices such as effect models having a drive unit as effect devices. May be.

  Note that the arrangement position (installation position) of each component is an example, and may be arranged at another position. For example, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display 20 may be provided on the same side (right side portion or left side portion) of the game area. Further, for example, the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, and the universal figure hold indicator 25C may be provided on the same side (right side portion or left side portion) of the game area.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the general figure display 20 starts the general figure game based on the establishment of the general figure start condition after the general figure start condition has been established. In the ordinary figure game, after starting the variable display of the ordinary symbol (after starting the variation of the ordinary symbol), when the predetermined time which is the ordinary figure change time has elapsed, the fixed ordinary symbol that becomes the variable display result of the ordinary symbol Is stopped (displayed). At this time, as a fixed ordinary symbol, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) such as a number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed, the variable display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per symbol”. On the other hand, as the fixed ordinary symbol, if a regular symbol other than the regular symbol, such as a number or a symbol other than the number indicating "7", is stopped and displayed, the variable display result of the regular symbol is "ordinary symbol loss". Become. In response to the fact that the variable display result of the ordinary symbol is "universal symbol", the expansion opening control (tilt control) in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip that constitutes the normally variable winning ball device 6B is in the tilted position is performed. When a predetermined time elapses, the normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure game (first special figure game) by the first special symbol display device 4A is started based on the first start condition being satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied, and the second Based on that the second start condition is satisfied after the start condition is satisfied, the special figure game (second special figure game) by the second special symbol display device 4B is started. In the special figure game, after the variable display of the special symbol is started (after the fluctuation of the special symbol is started), when the variable display time as the special figure change time elapses, the variable display result of the special symbol is determined. Derivatively display the design (results of special figure display). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, the result is "big hit", and a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. If so, the predetermined display result is a "small hit". Also, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol, it becomes "miss".

  After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as a specific game state in which a round advantageous to the player (also called "round game") is executed a predetermined number of times. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", the small hit game state is controlled as a special game state different from the big hit game state.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as an example, special symbols showing numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” are big hit symbols, and special symbols showing numbers “2” are small hit symbols. , The special symbol indicating the symbol "-" is a lost symbol. In addition, each symbol such as a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, and a lost symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A with the first special symbol display device is a special symbol different from each symbol in the second special symbol game with the second special symbol display device 4B. You may make it a symbol, and the special symbols common to both special symbol games may be a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, and a lost symbol.

  After the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game and becomes the "big hit" as the specific display result, in the big hit game state, the big winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 has a predetermined upper limit time. The special winning opening is opened for a period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 0.1 seconds) or a predetermined number of (e.g., 9) winning balls. As a result, a round in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is brought into the first state (open state), which is advantageous for the player, is executed.

  The special winning a prize sphere device, by receiving the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2, and then closing the special winning a prize, the special award winning prize door which opened the big prize award during the execution of the round. 7 is changed to a second state (closed state), which is disadvantageous to the player, and one round is ended. The round, which is the opening cycle of the special winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of times of execution reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, "15"). Even before the number of times the round has been executed reaches the upper limit, the execution of the round may be ended when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball has not won in the special winning opening). ..

  Among the rounds in the big hit game state, the round in which the upper limit time for setting the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player is a relatively long time (for example, 29 seconds) is normally opened. Also called a round. On the other hand, a round in which the upper limit time for which the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the first state (open state) is a relatively short time (for example, 0.1 seconds) is also called a short-term open round.

  Of the special symbols showing the numbers "3", "5", "7" which are big hit symbols, the special symbols showing the numbers "3", "7" are usually open round big hit symbols, and the number "5" The special design that indicates is a short-term open round jackpot design. In the special opening game, the special opening winning jackpot of the special variable winning prize ball device 7 in the jackpot gaming state (normal opening jackpot state) as the normal opening round specific gaming state that is controlled after the jackpot symbol is released. The door opens the special winning opening until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds), which is the first period, or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls are generated. By doing so, a round for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state (open state), which is advantageous for the player, is executed. The normal open jackpot state is also called the first specific game state.

  Short-term open round as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game Short-term open round controlled after the big-hit symbol is derived In the big-hit gaming state as a specific game state (short-term open big-hit state), the special variable winning ball device 7 is used in each round. The second period (for example, 0) in which the upper limit time (upper limit of the period during which the special winning opening is opened by the special winning opening door) is shorter than the first period in the normal opening big hit state, is changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player. . 1 second). It should be noted that in the short-term open big hit state, the opening period of the special winning opening may be controlled to be the second period, and other controls may be performed in the same manner as in the normal open big hit state. Alternatively, in the short-time open jackpot state, the number of rounds executed may be the second round number (eg, “2”) smaller than the first round number (eg, “15”) in the normal open jackpot state.

  In such a short-term open big hit state, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of payout balls (prize balls) can be obtained if a game ball wins the big winning opening. However, the opening period of the special winning opening is the second period (0.1 seconds or the like), which is very short. Therefore, the short-term open big hit state is a big hit game state in which the payout (prize ball) is not substantially obtained. The short-term open jackpot state is also called the second specific game state.

  In addition, the big hit game state as a short-term open round specific game state is not limited to one in which the period of opening the special winning opening is shorter than that of the big hit gaming state as the normal opening round specific playing state. For example, opening of the special winning opening The period (upper limit time) is the same in the short-term open round specific game state and the normal open-round specific game state, but in the short-term open round specific game state, the upper limit number of times (for example, 2 times) for opening the special winning opening is It may be smaller than the upper limit number of times (for example, 15 times) in the normal opening round specific game state. That is, in the big hit game state as the short-term open round specific game state, the period during which the big winning opening is changed to the first state where the game ball easily passes (enters) in each round is longer than the first period in the normal open round specific game state. The second period is also shorter, and the number of times the round is executed is the second round number which is smaller than the first round number in the normal open round specific gaming state, as long as it is at least one of them. . In this way, it is only necessary that the first specific game state and the second specific game state have different degrees of advantage for the player.

  After the special symbol indicating the number "2" which is the small hit symbol is derived as the fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, it is controlled to the small hit game state as the special game state. In this small hitting game state, as in the short-term open big hitting state, a variable winning operation is performed in the special variable winning ball device 7 to change the special winning opening to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player. That is, in the small hitting game state, for example, the operation of setting the special variable winning ball device 7 in the first state (open state) is repeatedly executed for the second period. Also for this small hit game state, it is sufficient if the degree of advantage is low with respect to the first specific game state.

  In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R arranged in the display area of the image display device 5, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In response to the start of one of the special figure games, the variable display of the decorative design is started. In the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variable display state of the decorative pattern is changed to a specific variable during the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the end of the variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern. There may be a predetermined reach state that constitutes a part of the display combination.

  The reach state is a decorative pattern that is not yet stopped and displayed when the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the big hit combination (also referred to as “reach variation pattern”). Is a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or some of the decorative patterns are synchronized and vary while forming all or part of the jackpot combination. In the following description, reaching the reach state is also referred to as reaching the reach (establishing the reach).

  In addition, in response to the reach state, the changing speed of the decorative design is reduced, or a character image (effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative design is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. By changing the display mode of the background image, playing back and displaying a moving image that is different from the decorative pattern, or changing the changing mode of the decorative pattern, a performance effect different from that before the reach state is executed. May be done. The production operation such as the display of the character image and the display mode of the background image, the reproduction display of the moving image, and the change of the variation mode of the decorative pattern are referred to as reach production (or reach production display). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 5, but also the voice output operation by the speaker 8 and the light emitting operation (lighting operation, blinking operation, extinguishing operation) of the first lamp 9 and the like are set as the reach state. It may be included that the operation mode is different from the previous operation mode.

  As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of kinds of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, depending on the effect pattern, the possibility that the jackpot combination or the like will be finally stopped and displayed after the reach effect (also referred to as “big hit expectation” or “big hit reliability”) may be different. Thereby, the jackpot expectation can be changed according to which of a plurality of types of reach effects is executed, that is, depending on which reach effect is to appear. As an example, in the present embodiment, the reach mode of normal reach and the reach mode of super reach, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the normal reach, are preset (prepared).

  Note that the jackpot expectation degree is, for example, (probability that the effect is executed during the jackpot)×(probability that the jackpot will occur)/{(probability that the effect will be executed during the jackpot)×(probability that the jackpot)+(jackpot It is calculated by (probability that the effect is executed at times other than time)×(probability of not being a big hit)} (when the expectation of a big hit is “1”, the variable display result is always a “big hit”).

  Further, during the variable display of the decorative pattern, as one mode of the variable display effect, it is possible to execute a sliding effect or a pseudo continuous effect realized by a variable display operation of the decorative pattern or the like. In the sliding effect, after changing the decorative design in all of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, a plurality of decorative design display areas (for example, "left" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5R, etc.) After the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern at, the predetermined number of decorative pattern display areas (for example, "1" or "2") in the temporary stopped display decorative pattern display area (for example, "left" decorative pattern display area) 5L and the “right” decorative pattern display area 5R (either one or both)), the decorative design is changed again, and then stopped and displayed, thereby effecting display for changing the decorative design to be stopped and displayed. In this way, in the sliding effect, a plurality of decorative patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed after the variable display of the decorative patterns is started until the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, and then the predetermined number of decorative patterns are changed. By executing the display again, there are times when the variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes the reach state and when the decorative pattern that does not reach the reach state and constitutes the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed.

  In the pseudo continuous production, in response to either one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special drawing game being satisfied once, the fixed decoration that becomes the variable display result after the variable display of the decorative design is started By the time the symbols are derived and displayed, all the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, a predetermined pseudo consecutive chance or the like is part of any of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R). (Or displayed on all) is temporarily stopped, and then, in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the re-variable display, which is an effect display for starting the variable display of all decorative symbols, is predetermined. It can be performed once (for example, up to four times).

  In the present embodiment, the number of times of re-variable display (re-variable display number) in the pseudo continuous production is variable display until the first temporary stop of all the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R (first time). (Variable display) number of times (1 time), the number of re-variable display (final variable display) after all the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped (1 time), and the re-display between the first variable display and the last variable display. It is grasped as the number of times (X+1) that is one less than the number of times (X+2) that is the sum of the number X of variable displays (X is 0 or 1 or more). In addition, the number of times of revariable display is the same as the number of times (temporary stop number) in which all the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that the first variable display to the first temporary stop display are also referred to as the first pseudo continuous, the second variable display (the first re-variable display) to the second temporary stop display are also referred to as the second pseudo continuous, The third variable display (second re-variable display) to the third temporary stop display are also referred to as the third pseudo-sequential display, and the fourth variable display (third re-variable display) to the fourth temporary stop display. Also referred to as the fourth pseudo run. Further, the number of pseudo consecutives in the pseudo consecutive production is also referred to as a pseudo consecutive variation number (or a pseudo consecutive number). In other words, the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations, the number of revariable displays, and the number of temporary stops are the same. It should be noted that the increase in the number of pseudo runs such as the first, second, third,... Is also referred to as “the pseudo run continues”.

  In the variable display effect of "pseudo-run", the variable design is changed based on that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once by performing the re-variable display (re-change) once to four times. The display can be made to appear as if it was started two to five times in a row.

  In the pseudo continuous production, before the reach is established in the variation (before the reach state is reached), the pseudo continuous chance eye is temporarily stopped and displayed in any or all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. As described above, the decorative designs in all the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be temporarily stopped, or after reaching the reach, in any of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The decorative symbols in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be temporarily stopped so that the pseudo consecutive chances are temporarily stopped and displayed. That is, the production mode of the temporary stop display in the pseudo continuous production includes at least the production mode in which the temporary stop display is performed before the reach state and the production mode in which the chance symbol is temporarily displayed after the reach state. You may.

  The sliding effect (similar to the pseudo continuous effect) is a notification or suggestion to the player that any one of the reach effects may be executed, that a certain reach effect may be executed, or that the jackpot expectation is high. May be. Hereinafter, an effect for giving a notice or suggesting to a player that any one of the reach effects or a certain reach effect may be executed or that the jackpot expectation degree is high may be collectively referred to as an announcement effect. In addition to the sliding effect and the pseudo continuous effect, the notice effect may use a variable display operation different from the sliding effect and the pseudo continuous effect, for example, a background image is displayed and a message window is displayed. , Hold display, voice output, light emission (lighting, blinking, extinguishing), and the like may be used that use effect operations different from the variable display effect.

In the present embodiment, as the notice effect, it is commonly executed when the display mode of the special image including the active display corresponding to the pending display corresponding to the change is changed and when the display mode of the special image is not changed. It includes a common production. Further, the notice effect includes a success effect in which the display mode of the special image is changed after executing the common effect, and a failure effect in which the display mode of the special image is not changed after executing the common effect.
The notice effect may include a suggestion effect that suggests a common effect. Further, like the common effect, the suggestive effect may be an effect that is commonly executed when the display mode of the special image is changed and when the display mode of the special image is not changed. In other words, an effect that suggests that the common effect is executed is called a suggestive effect, and an effect that suggests that either the successful effect or the unsuccessful effect is executed (the common effect or the common effect. There is a case in which another effect is referred to as a suggestion effect.

  It should be noted that the notice effect may be executed (started) before the player can determine (actually check) whether or not the notice effect or the content suggested by the notice effect is realized. For example, the notice effect that gives a notice or suggests to the player that the variable display state of the decorative pattern due to the winning of a certain game ball may reach the reach state is at least the variable display state of the decorative pattern due to the winning of the game ball. It may be executed (started) before it reaches the reach state (or the non-reach state). In addition, the notice effect that gives a notice or suggests to the player that the variable display result due to the winning of a certain game ball may be a "big hit" is at least the fixed decorative pattern due to the winning of the game ball being stopped and displayed. May be executed (started) before.

  The notice effect may include a pre-read notice effect (also referred to as “preliminary determination notice effect”). The pre-reading notice effect determines whether or not the variable display result of the variable display becomes a "big hit" before starting the variable display that is the subject of the notice based on the special game game hold information and the like. (Pre-reading) is a notice effect that is executed based on the determination result. In the following description, the hold information that is the target of the prefetch notice presentation is called target hold information, the first hold display corresponding to the target hold information is called the target first hold display, and corresponds to the target hold information. The second hold display is referred to as the target second hold display, and the variable display corresponding to the target hold information is also referred to as the target variable display. In addition, the pre-reading notice effect is executed while the target hold information is being consumed (when the target hold information is being consumed, including during variable display of the target) and before the target hold information. There is a case where it is executed while the hold information is being consumed, a case where the target hold information is being consumed, and a case where the hold information prior to the target hold information is being consumed.

  A performance operation which is a pre-reading notice effect by winning a certain game ball is performed by the player after the winning of the game ball (after the start condition is satisfied), and whether or not the content predicted by the pre-reading notice effect is realized. It may be executed (started) before it can be determined. For example, due to the winning of a certain game ball, the effect of a pre-reading notice effect for notifying (indicating) the player in advance that there is a possibility of reaching the reach state is at least the decorative pattern due to the prize of the game ball. It may be executed (started) before the variable display state becomes the reach state (or the non-reach state). In addition, at least the presentation operation of the pre-reading notice production for notifying (indicating) to the player in advance that the variable display result due to the winning of a certain game ball may be a "big hit" It suffices that it is executed (started) before the fixed decorative pattern due to winning is stopped and displayed.

  The pre-reading notice effect (preliminary determination notice effect) may be, for example, a hold change effect that changes the display mode of the first hold display in the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL or a first start prize winning memory display area 5HL. An action effect such as an on-hold change gasse effect that does not change the display mode of the first hold display may be prepared. Further, the prefetch notice effect (preliminary determination notice effect) is, for example, a hold change effect for changing the display mode of the second hold display in the second start prize winning memory display area 5HR or a second start prize winning memory display area 5HR. An action effect such as an on-hold change gasse effect that does not change the display mode of the second hold display may be prepared.

  As a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, when a special symbol that is a lost symbol is stopped (derived), the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not reach the reach state after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In some cases, a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display mode of the decorative pattern is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “miss”.

  As a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, when the special symbol that is a lost symbol is stopped (derived), the variable display state of the decorative symbol is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Correspondingly, after the reach effect is executed, the fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined reach-miss combination may be stopped and displayed. The variable display result of such a decorative pattern is referred to as a variable display mode of "reach" (also referred to as "reach loss") when the variable display result is "miss".

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, if the normal jackpot symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number "3" is stopped and displayed among the special symbols that are normally open round jackpot symbols, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is Corresponding to reaching the reach state, after a predetermined reach effect is executed, etc., a fixed decoration that becomes a predetermined normal big hit combination (also referred to as "non-certain variation big hit combination") among a plurality of kinds of big hit combinations The design is stopped and displayed. The predetermined normal jackpot combination is, for example, a normal pattern of the same type (also referred to as “non-probable variation pattern”) on a predetermined effective line (for example, a straight line) formed by the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Is a combination in which the final stop is displayed together. An example of a normal symbol is, among the eight types of decorative symbols with the symbol numbers “1” to “8”, four types of decorative symbols with the even symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8”. Is.

  Corresponding to the fact that the fixed special symbol in the special drawing game becomes the normal big hit symbol, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, the fixed decorative symbol of the normal big hit combination is displayed in a stopped state. , Which is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as "big hit type") of "indeterminate change" (also referred to as "normal big hit") when the variable display result is "big hit". Based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit" in the "non-probable change" big hit type, the normal open big hit state is controlled, and after the end, time reduction control (time saving control) is performed.

  By performing the time saving control, the variable display time (special figure variation time) of the special symbol in the special figure game is shortened as compared with the normal state. The normal state is a normal game state different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state, and an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, initialization processing after power-on). The same control as in the state (1) is executed. In the time saving control, one of a condition that a special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the jackpot gaming state is ended and that a variable display result is “big hit” is established first. Sometimes you just have to quit.

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, if the probability variation big hit symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number "7" is stopped and displayed among the special symbols that are normally open round jackpot symbols, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is Corresponding to the fact that the reach state has been reached, after a reach effect similar to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative design is "normal" is executed, etc. In some cases, the fixed decorative pattern that is displayed is stopped and displayed. In other words, when the probability variation big hit design is finally stopped and displayed in the special figure game, the decoration design which is the predetermined probability variation big hit combination is finally stopped, and the decoration pattern which is the predetermined normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. There are cases where it will be done. The predetermined probability variation big hit combination is, for example, a combination in which probability variation symbols of the same type are lined up on the activated line and finally stopped and displayed. An example of the probability variation pattern is, among the eight types of decorative symbols with the symbol numbers “1” to “8”, four types of decorative symbols with the odd number “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7”. Is.

Regardless of whether the fixed decorative pattern is a normal big hit combination or a probability variation big hit combination, the variable display mode in which the probability variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the special drawing game is "big hit". In this case, it is called a variable display mode of "probability change" (also called "big hit type"). Based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit" in the "probable change" big hit type, the normal open big hit state is controlled, and after that, stochastic variation control (probability change control) is performed together with time saving control. By performing the probability variation control, the probability that the variable display result (special figure display result) is a "big hit" in each special figure game is improved to be higher than in the normal state. The probability variation control may be ended when the condition that the variable display result becomes "big hit" after the end of the big hit game state and the big hit game state is controlled again.
Like the time saving control, the probability variation control may be ended when the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the end of the big hit game state. In addition, even if the probability variation control is finished when the "probability variation falling" decision is made to end the probability variation control in the probability variation falling lottery that is executed each time the special figure game is started after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Good.

  When the time saving control is performed, the control for shortening the variation time of the regular symbol in the regular symbol game by the regular symbol display 20 (general symbol variation time) than in the normal state, or the variation of the regular symbol in each regular symbol game Control for improving the probability that the display result will be "Public hit" compared to that in the normal state, tilt control of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 6B based on that the variable display result is "Public hit" In order to make it easier for the game ball to pass (enter) through the second start winning port, such as a control for making the tilt control time for performing the tilt control longer than in the normal state, and a control for increasing the number of tilts than in the normal state. By increasing the possibility that the starting condition will be satisfied, control that is advantageous to the player is performed. In this way, the control that makes it easier for the player to enter the game ball into the second start winning port along with the time saving control is advantageous for the player, and is also called high opening control. As the high opening control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed.

  By performing the high opening control, the frequency of the second starting winning opening being in the expanded opening state is increased as compared with the case where the high opening control is not performed. Therefore, the second start condition for executing the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is easily established, and the second special figure game can be executed frequently, so that the next variable display result can be obtained. The time until it becomes a "big hit" is shortened. The period in which the high opening control can be executed is also called a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period in which the time saving control is performed.

  The game state in which both the time saving control and the high opening control are performed is also called a time saving state or a high base state. The gaming state in which the probability variation control is performed is also referred to as a probability variation state or a highly accurate state. The gaming state in which the time saving control and the high opening control are performed together with the probability variation control is also referred to as a highly accurate high base state. The probability variation state in which only the probability variation control is performed and the time saving control or the high opening control is not performed is also referred to as a highly accurate low base state. It should be noted that only the gaming state in which the time saving control and the high opening control are performed together with the probability variation control may be referred to as a "probability variation state" in particular, and may be referred to as a time variation with probability reduction state in order to distinguish it from the high accuracy low base state. On the other hand, the certainty variation state in which only the certainty variation control is performed and neither the time saving control nor the high opening control is performed (the highly accurate low base state) may be referred to as the no-time saving certainty variation state in order to distinguish from the highly accurate high base state. The time saving state in which the time saving control or the high opening control is performed without performing the probability variation control is also referred to as a low accuracy high base state. The normal state in which neither the probability variation control, the time reduction control, nor the high opening control is performed is also referred to as a low accuracy low base state. When at least one of the time saving control and the probability variation control is performed in the game state other than the normal state, the special figure game (second special figure game) can be frequently executed, and each special figure game (first special figure game) is executed. By increasing the probability that the variable display result in the "drawing game and the second special drawing game" will be a "big hit", it becomes an advantageous state for the player. A gaming state that is advantageous to the player and different from the jackpot gaming state is also called a special gaming state.

  As a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, when a short-term open round big hit symbol such as a special symbol indicating the number "5" is stopped and displayed, or a small hit symbol such as a special symbol indicating the number "2" is stopped and displayed. In this case, the variable display state of the decorative design may not reach the reach state, and any one of a combination of a plurality of types of fixed decorative designs predetermined as the opening opportunity may be stopped and displayed. Further, as the fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, when the short-term open round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, a predetermined reach effect is executed in response to the variable display state of the decorative symbol being in the reach state. After a certain time, a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined reach combination may be stopped and displayed.

  Corresponding to the fact that the fixed special symbol in the special figure game becomes a short-term open round big hit symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which various fixed decorative symbols are stopped and displayed is when the variable display result is "big hit". It is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as "big hit type") of "attack probability" (also referred to as "sudden probability big hit" or "sudden probability big hit"). Based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit" in the "hit" big hit type, the short-term open big hit state is controlled, and after the end, the time variation control and the probability variation control may be performed.

  As a fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the small hit symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number "2" is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result is "small hit", and the small hit game state is controlled. After the end, the game state is not changed and the variable display result is continuously controlled to the game state before the "small hit". However, if the special drawing game in which the variable display result is "small hit" is executed, and the number of executions of the special drawing game in the special game state has reached a predetermined number, after the small hit game state ends, The special game state may end and the normal state may occur.

  The re-lottery effect may be executed during the variable display of the decorative design in which the fixed decorative design is the non-probable-variable big-hit combination or the probable-variable big-jack combination. For example, as a re-lottery effect, in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, after the decorative designs that are normally a big hit combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, the same decorative designs are varied again to be changed to a probability variation big hit combination. Either of the decorative pattern (probability variation pattern) and the decorative pattern (normal pattern) that is usually a combination of big hits may be finally stopped and displayed as the fixed decorative pattern.

  After the fixed decorative pattern which is usually a big hit combination is derived and displayed, at the start of the big hit game state or during the execution of a round in the big hit game state, the next round starts after one of the rounds has ended in the big hit game state During the big hit, which is a certainty change notification production of whether to control to the certainty change state during the period from the end of the last round in the big hit game state to the start of the next variable display game, etc. Promotion production may be executed. The notification effect similar to the jackpot promotion promotion effect may be executed during the first variable display game after the jackpot gaming state is over. The jackpot mid-promotion production that is executed after the final round in the jackpot gaming state is sometimes called "ending promotion production".

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, a production control board 12, a sound control board 13, a first lamp control board 14, and a power supply board D1 as shown in FIG. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12, the effect control board 12 and a display control unit 16 described later, and the like. A relay board 19 and the like for relaying various control signals transmitted to and from is also mounted. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 or the like of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly intended for a random number setting function used in a special figure game, a function for inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and a sub-side control board including an effect control board 12 and the like. It has a function of outputting a control command as an example of the command information as a control signal and transmitting it, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like. Moreover, the main board 11 performs lighting/extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) which comprises the 1st special symbol display device 4A and the 2nd special symbol display device 4B, and the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol. The variable display of predetermined identification information, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by turning on/off/coloring the normal symbol display 20. It also has a control function. The main board 11 also has a function of controlling the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the universal figure hold indicator 25C, and the like to display various hold memories.

  The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that receives detection signals from various switches for detecting a game ball and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 100, and the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 and the like for transmitting solenoid drive signals to the solenoids 81 and 82 are mounted.

  The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board that is independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and controls the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the first board. Various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electric parts such as the 1 lamp 9, the information display section 51, the second lamp 52, the drive mechanism 53, and the versalizer 54 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 controls the display operation in the image display device 5 and the information display section 51, the whole or part of the sound output operation from the speaker 8, and the lighting/extinguishing operation in the first lamp 9 and the second lamp 52. All or a part of the above, the operation of the drive mechanism 53, the operation of the versarizer 54, and the like, are provided with the function of determining the control contents for causing the electric parts for effect to execute a predetermined effect operation.

  The voice control board 13 is a control board for voice output control that is provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs audio from the speaker 8 based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. A processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is installed. The first lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control that is provided separately from the effect control board 12, and lights the first lamp 9 or the like based on a command or control data from the effect control board 12. / It is equipped with a lamp driver circuit that drives the lights off.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is further equipped with a display drive unit 16, a second lamp drive unit 17, and an accessory drive unit 18. The display drive unit 16, the second lamp drive unit 17, and the accessory drive unit 18 may be mounted on the same board or may be mounted on different boards.

  The display drive section 16 drives the information display section 51 based on a command or control data transmitted from the effect control board 12 via the relay board 19 to cause the information display section 51 to display predetermined information. Is configured. The display drive unit 16 and the information display unit 51 may be mounted on the same board (a board different from the relay board 19) or may be mounted on different boards. In the information display section 51, each of the first reserved display 51A, the second reserved display 51B, the character display 51C, the fourth symbol display 51D, and the fourth symbol display 51E is driven, and the first special figure reserved memory number. , 2nd special figure reservation storage number, character string, 4th design etc. are displayed.

  The 2nd lamp drive part 17 is equipped with the lamp driver circuit etc. which carry out lighting/extinguishing drive of the 2nd lamp 52 based on the command, control data, etc. transmitted from the production|generation control board 12 via the relay board 19. The second lamp driving unit 17 and the second lamp 52 may be mounted on the same board (a board different from the relay board 19) or may be mounted on different boards.

  The accessory drive unit 18 supplies a drive signal to a stepping motor or the like of the drive mechanism 53 based on a command or control data transmitted from the effect control board 12 via the relay board 19 to operate the drive mechanism 53. Is configured. The accessory drive unit 18 and the drive mechanism 53 may be mounted on the same board (a board different from the relay board 19) or may be mounted on different boards. The drive mechanism 53 has a rotational position sensor that detects the rotational position of the stepping motor (rotational position of the versa writer 54). The rotational position sensor detects, for example, that the stepping motor is at the initial position (the versa writer 54 is at the initial position), and supplies (feedback) a detection signal indicating the detection to the effect control board 12.

  The versa lighter 54 includes an LED group 545 and a third lamp driving unit 541. The third lamp drive unit 541 is a lamp driver circuit that performs lighting/extinguishing drive of the LED group 545 based on commands and control data transmitted from the effect control substrate 12 via the relay substrate 19 and the accessory drive unit 18, and the like. Is equipped with. The third lamp driving unit 541 of the versa lighter 54 includes a slip ring 541A (FIG. 2, etc.). The slip ring 541A rotatably connects the versa lighter 54 to the outside. The electric power and the control signal supplied to the versa lighter 54 are supplied to the inside of the versa lighter (third lamp driving unit 541) via the slip ring 541A. The LED group 545 and the third lamp driving unit 541 may be mounted on the same board or may be mounted on different boards.

  The power supply board D1 supplies electric power to the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. Electric power supplied to the electric parts (those connected to the main board 11) such as the solenoid 81, the first reserved display 25A, and the first special symbol display device 4A is supplied from the power supply board D1 through the main board 11. To be done. The main board 11 supplies appropriate electric power by applying a voltage required for each electric component to each electric component. Various control boards such as the voice control board 13 and the first lamp control board 14, various lamps such as the first lamp 9, motors of the drive mechanism 53, various electric parts such as the versatile lighter 54 (connected to the production control board 12). Electric power supplied to things and control objects of the effect control board 12) is supplied from the power supply board D1 via the effect control board 12. The production control board 12 supplies appropriate electric power by applying a voltage required for each electric component to each electric component. For example, 12V (VDD) is output as a voltage required to drive the stepping motor of the drive mechanism 53, 5V (VCC) is output as a voltage required to drive the serial-parallel conversion IC, and it is necessary to drive the LED to emit light. 5V (VCL) is output as the voltage. It should be noted that the electric power supplied to various driving parts for driving the various members of the versatilizer 54 and the rendering unit 50 may be relayed to the relay board 15. In addition, the electric power supplied to the versatile device 54 may be supplied via the accessory driving unit 18 or may be directly supplied from the relay substrate 15. In addition, the electric power supplied to various electric components may be supplied without passing through the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 (may also be passed through a relay board or the like as appropriate).

  As shown in FIG. 3, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 is connected to the main substrate 11. The gate switch 21, the first starting opening switch 22A, the second starting opening switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have any configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as what is called a sensor. If In addition to the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, and the count switch 23, the gaming machine 1 similarly has other switches (for example, a glass door (not shown) connected to the main board 11). ), a switch for detecting the open/closed state, a switch for detecting the open/closed state of the game board 2 itself, a switch for detecting unauthorized vibration, and a switch for detecting unauthorized electromagnetic waves). Further, on the main board 11, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the ordinary symbol display device 20, the first holding display device 25A, the second holding display device 25B, the public figure holding display device 25C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

  The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

  FIG. 5A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 5A is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals composing the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 5A, the command 8001H is a first fluctuation start command that specifies fluctuation start in the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command that designates variation start in the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a decorative pattern that is variably displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special drawing game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the designated variation pattern.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 5B, different EXT data is obtained depending on the determination result of whether the variable display result is “miss” or “big hit” and the determination result of the big hit type. Is set.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol determination command for designating the final stop symbol in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of the effect image showing the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A0XXH only needs to include a big hit start designation command indicating that it is a big hit game state and a small hit start designation command indicating that it is a small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a special winning opening open notification command for notifying that the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the special winning opening to notify that it is a period during which the special winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set depending on the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result, for example, by setting the EXT data similar to the variable display result notification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. .. In the special winning opening opening notification command and the big winning opening opening notification command, for example, different EXT data corresponding to the number of times the round has been executed (for example, “1” to “15”) in the normal opening jackpot state or the short-term jackpot opening state. Is set.

  The command B100H is the first special prize based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the first starting winning occurs. It is the 1st starting opening winning a prize designating command which notifies that the 1st starting condition in order to execute the 1st special figure game due to the design indicator 4A is satisfied.

  The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the second starting winning is generated. It is a second starting opening winning a prize designation command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the second special drawing game by the special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved memory number in order to display the first special figure reserved memory number such that it can be specified in the first starting prize winning memory display area 5HL or the like. . The command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved memory number so that the special figure reserved memory number can be specified in the second starting prize winning memory display area 5HR or the like.

  In the present embodiment, as the reserved storage information, a first starting opening winning award designating command and a second starting opening winning award designating command for designating whether the first starting winning opening is a winning start or the second starting winning opening is a starting winning. And the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command that specify the first special figure reserved storage number and the second special figure reserved storage number. It should be noted that when the number of reserved storages increases, the number of reserved storages addition designation command (first reserved storage count addition designation command or second designation (Reserved storage number addition designation command) is transmitted while the number of reserved storages decreases, the reserved storage count subtraction designation command (first It is also possible to transmit a 1-hold storage number subtraction designation command or a second hold storage number subtraction designation command).

  Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command or the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. Further, a total reserved storage number addition designation command (total reserved storage number subtraction designation command) for notifying the increase (or decrease) of the total reserved storage number may be transmitted.

  The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning-time determination result designating command) indicating the contents of the winning-time determination result. Among them, the command C4XXH is a symbol designating command showing the determination result of whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit” is there. Further, the command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating the determination result of the variation category (also referred to as “variation pattern type”) as the winning determination result. The variation category is a name when the variation patterns of decorative patterns are classified (aggregated) by type. In other words, the variation category is a group name of each group including variation patterns of one or more decorative patterns that are categorized into a common group.

  In the present embodiment, in the winning random number determination process (see FIG. 17(A)), when the start winning occurs, the variable display result is determined as "big hit" based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. Whether or not it is determined or whether or not it is determined to be a "small hit", and when it is determined to be a "big hit", the type of the big hit is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the type of the big hit, and the variation The variation category (variation pattern type) is determined based on the random number MR3 for category determination. Then, a value corresponding to the determination result is set in the EXT data of the symbol designating command and the variation category command, and control is performed to transmit to the effect control board 12. Based on the value set in the symbol designation command, the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines whether or not the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” or “small hit” and the big hit type. In addition to being recognizable, the variation category can be recognized based on the value set in the variation category command.

  The effect control commands such as the variation pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command are used when the effect control CPU 120 controls one or more effect devices (the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the first lamp 9, etc.). Used. Hereinafter, the effect control command used to control the image display operation in the image display device 5 is a display control command, the effect control command used to control the audio output from the speaker 8 is a voice control command, and the first lamp 9 emits light. The effect control command used to control the operation (lighting operation, blinking operation, extinguishing operation) is also referred to as a lamp control command. It should be noted that some of the effect control commands may be a display control command, a voice control command, and a lamp control command.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and has a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a program for game control to perform a control operation, and numerical data that indicates a random number value independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 for performing and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 are provided.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 to execute a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101 to read fixed data, the CPU 103 writes variable data to the RAM 102 to temporarily store various data, and the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102. A variable data read operation for reading out, a reception operation in which the CPU 103 receives various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I/O 105, and a CPU 103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I/O 105. The transmission operation of outputting various signals is also performed.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 6, in the present embodiment, on the main substrate 11 side, a random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, a random number value MR3 for determining the variation category, and a normal value. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the figure display result and the random number value MR5 for determining the variation pattern are controlled to be countable. A random number value other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. The random number used to control the progress of such a game is also called a game random number.

  The random number circuit 104 may be any one that counts numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR5. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of MR5 may be counted.

  Next, the variation pattern of the decorative pattern will be described. Hereinafter, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “miss” is referred to as “loss variation pattern”. The loss variation pattern corresponds to the "non-reach variation pattern ("non-reach variation pattern" "non-reach" when the variable display result of the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach". (Also referred to as "(miss) variation pattern")", or "variable display result of "variable", "reach variation pattern ("reach lost variation pattern") corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "reach" Also referred to as “”.

  A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "big hit" or "small hit" is referred to as a "hit variation pattern". The hit variation pattern includes a “big hit variation pattern” corresponding to the variable display result being “big hit” and a “small hit variation pattern” corresponding to the variable display result being “small hit”. As the jackpot variation pattern, a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to each jackpot type may be prepared.

  In the non-reach variation pattern, a plurality of variation patterns having different variation times are prepared corresponding to the time saving control executed when the total number of reserved memories is large, or when the game state is the probability variation state or the time reduction state. Good. As a result, any one of the variation patterns is selected in accordance with the total number of pending storages and the gaming state, so that it is possible to control the variation time to be reduced according to the total number of pending storages and the gaming state.

  For the variation patterns including the reach effect such as the big hit variation pattern and the reach variation pattern, the variation patterns corresponding to the reach modes of the respective reach effects are prepared. A variation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach is executed is referred to as a “normal reach variation pattern”, and a variation pattern in which the reach effect of super reach is performed is referred to as a “super reach variation pattern”.

  FIG. 7 shows a specific example of the fluctuation category and the fluctuation pattern in the present embodiment. In FIG. 7, the variation category “PA1” is a shortened/non-reach (miss) variation category. The variation pattern “PA1-1” belongs to the variation category “PA1”. The variation category “PA2” is a non-reach (miss) variation category. The variation patterns “PA2-1” to “PA2-3” belong to the variation category “PA2”. The variation category “PA3” is a normal reach (miss) variation category. The fluctuation patterns “PA3-1” and “PA3-2” belong to the fluctuation category “PA3”. The variation category “PA4” is a super reach α (miss) variation category. The variation patterns “PA4-1” to “PA4-4” belong to the variation category “PA4”. The variation category “PA5” is a super reach β (miss) variation category. The fluctuation patterns “PA5-1” to “PA5-4” belong to the fluctuation category “PA5”. The variation category “PB3” is a normal reach (big hit) variation category. The fluctuation patterns “PB3-1” and “PB3-2” belong to the fluctuation category “PB3”. The variation category “PB4” is a super reach α (big hit) variation category. The fluctuation patterns “PB4-1” to “PB4-4” belong to the fluctuation category “PB4”. The variation category “PB5” is a super reach β (big hit) variation category. The fluctuation patterns “PB5-1” to “PB5-4” belong to the fluctuation category “PB5”.

  The variation pattern “PA2-1” belonging to the variation category “PA2” is a non-reach (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length as non-reach (loss). The variation pattern “PA2-2” is a non-reach (loss) variation pattern in which the sliding effect is executed. Note that the special figure change time of the change pattern "PA2-2" is longer than the special figure change time of the change pattern "PA2-1" because the sliding effect is executed. The same applies to other variation patterns in which the sliding effect is executed. The variation pattern “PA2-3” is a non-reach (miss) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. The special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PA2-3" is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PA2-1" because the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed. The same applies to other variation patterns in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed. The variation pattern “PA1-1” belonging to the variation category “PA1” is a non-reach (miss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is shorter than that of the variation pattern “PA2-1”.

  The variation pattern “PA3-1” belonging to the variation category “PA3” is a normal reach (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length as a normal reach (loss). In addition, the variation pattern “PA3-2” is a normal reach (miss) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PA4-1” belonging to the variation category “PA4” is a super reach α (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is normally long as the super reach α (loss). The variation pattern “PA4-2” is a super reach α (loss) variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed as a guise. The special figure change time of the change pattern "PA4-2" is longer than the special figure change time of the change pattern "PA4-1" because the pseudo-continuous change (effect) is executed as a guise. The same applies to other variation patterns in which pseudo-repeated variation (effect) is executed as a fake. The variation pattern “PA4-3” is a super reach α (loss) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. Further, the variation pattern “PA4-4” is a super reach α (loss) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed twice.

  The variation pattern “PA5-1” belonging to the variation category “PA5” is a super reach β (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length as super reach β (loss). The variation pattern “PA5-2” is a super reach β (loss) variation pattern in which pseudo-repeated variation (effect) is executed as a fake. The variation pattern “PA5-3” is a super reach β (loss) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. Further, the variation pattern “PA5-4” is a super reach β (loss) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed twice.

  The variation pattern “PB3-1” belonging to the variation category “PB3” is a normal reach (big hit) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length as a normal reach (big hit). In addition, the variation pattern “PB3-2” is a normal reach (big hit) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PB4-1” belonging to the variation category “PB4” is a super reach α (big hit) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is normally long as super reach α (big hit). The fluctuation pattern “PB4-2” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-repeated fluctuations (effects) are executed as a guise. The variation pattern “PB4-3” is a super reach α (big hit) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. Further, the variation pattern “PB4-4” is a super reach α (big hit) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed twice.

  The fluctuation pattern "PB5-1" belonging to the fluctuation category "PB5" is a super-reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is normally long as super-reach β (big hit). The fluctuation pattern “PB5-2” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-repeated fluctuations (effects) are executed as a guise. The variation pattern “PB5-3” is a super reach β (big hit) variation pattern in which the pseudo-repeated variation (effect) is executed once. Further, the variation pattern “PB5-4” is a super reach β (big hit) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed twice.

  It should be noted that, in FIG. 7, description of the variation pattern when the big hit type of the small hit variation pattern and the big hit variation pattern is abrupt is omitted, but the variation pattern of variation (non-reach variation pattern, Reach loss variation pattern) and the big hit variation pattern (except when the big hit type is abrupt).

  The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 3 stores various data used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, etc. prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, in the ROM 101, data (for example, information for specifying the content of the control command) forming a plurality of command tables used by the CPU 103 to transmit control signals which are various control commands from the main board 11, and a diagram. Data and the like that make up the table shown in FIG. 7 are stored.

  FIG. 8 shows an example of the configuration of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the present embodiment, as the special figure display result decision table, a first special figure display result decision table 130A shown in FIG. 8(A) and a second special figure display result decision table 130B shown in FIG. 8(B). , Prepared in advance. In the first special symbol display result determination table 130A, a fixed special symbol that is a variable display result in the first special symbol game (special symbol game using the first special symbol) by the first special symbol display device 4A is derived and displayed. Previously, whether to control the variable display result as a "big hit" in the big hit game state, or whether to control the variable display result as a "small hit" in the small hit game state, for determining the special figure display result 3 is a table that is referred to for making a decision based on the random number value MR1. In the second special symbol display result determination table 130B, a fixed special symbol that is a variable display result in the second special symbol game (special symbol game using the second special symbol) by the second special symbol display device 4B is derived and displayed. Previously, whether to control the variable display result as a "big hit" in the big hit game state, or whether to control the variable display result as a "small hit" in the small hit game state, for determining the special figure display result 3 is a table that is referred to for making a decision based on the random number value MR1.

  In the first special figure display result determination table 130A, the special figure is displayed depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the time saving state (low certainty state), or the certainty changed state (high certainty state). A numerical value (decision value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for result determination is assigned to the special figure display results of "big hit", "small hit", and "miss". In the second special figure display result determination table 130B, depending on whether the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low certainty state) or the probability variation state (high certainty state), the disturbance for determining the special figure display result is displayed. The numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the numerical value MR1 is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "miss".

  In each of the first special figure display result determination table 130A and the second special figure display result determination table 130B, when the game state is the definite change state (high accuracy state), it is the normal state or the time saving state (low accuracy state). More decision values than the above are assigned to the special jackpot display result of "big hit". Thereby, in the probability variation state (high accuracy state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, as compared to the normal state or the time saving state (low accuracy state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and the big hit game The probability of being determined to control the state increases.

  In the setting example of the first special figure display result determination table 130A, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "30000" to "30350") are assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". On the other hand, in the setting example of the second special figure display result determination table 130B, the determined value is not assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". With such a setting, since the "small hit" does not occur in the second special figure game, the normal variable winning ball device 6B is formed, for example, in a time saving state (low accurate high base state) or a positive change state (high accurate high base state). In the gaming state where the game ball easily enters the second start winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a “small hit” where it is difficult to obtain the prize ball, and prevent the deterioration of the game interest due to the extension of the game. ..

  In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table 130B and the first special figure display result determination table 130A, different predetermined range determination values may be assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". For example, in the second special figure display result determination table 130B, a smaller determination value than that in the first special figure display result determination table 130A may be assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". As a result, it is possible to avoid frequent occurrence of "small hit" in the game state in which the game ball easily enters the second start winning hole formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B. Alternatively, the special figure display result may be determined by referring to a common special figure display result determination table common to the first special figure game and the second special figure game.

  FIG. 9 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table 131 determines one of a plurality of jackpot types based on the jackpot type determination random number MR2 when it is determined to control the jackpot game state by setting the special figure display result to "jackpot". Is a table that is referred to for. In the jackpot type determination table 131, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A (special symbol game using the first special symbol) is executed, or the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The numerical value (decision value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type depending on whether (a special figure game using the second special figure) is executed is "non-probable change", "probable change", or "probable change". Is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots.

  In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table 131, when the first special figure game is executed, that is, when the special figure to be changed (also referred to as a variable special figure) is the first special figure, the determination value of the predetermined range ( (Values in the range of “82” to “99”) are assigned to the jackpot type of “probability”, on the other hand, when the second special figure game is executed, when the variation special figure is the second special figure, No decision value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability". With such a setting, since the "probability" is not obtained in the second special figure game, the prize ball can be obtained in the game state in which the game ball easily enters the second start winning hole formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of difficult “probability” and prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to the extension of the game.

  Note that different predetermined range determination values may be assigned to jackpot types of “probability” depending on whether the variation special map is the first special figure or the second variation special figure. .. For example, when the variation special map is the second special figure, a smaller determination value than that in the case where the variation special figure is the first special figure may be assigned to the jackpot type “probability”. As a result, it is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of the "probability" in the gaming state in which the game ball easily enters the second start winning hole formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B. Alternatively, the big hit type may be determined by referring to common table data when the variation special figure is the first special figure and the second special figure.

  The ROM 101 also stores a variation category determination table that is referred to when determining the variation category to be one of a plurality of types. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation category determination tables in which the types of variation categories that can be determined in the variation category determination table, the respective determination rates, and the like are different from each other. In the fluctuation category determination table, a numerical value (decision value) that is compared with the random value MR3 for fluctuation category determination is assigned to each fluctuation category. That is, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation category determination tables that have different determination values (for example, the range of the determination value and the number of determination values) assigned to at least one variation category of the plurality of types of variation categories. There is. Instead of the plurality of variation category determination tables, one large variation category determination table including information of all variation category determination tables may be stored in the ROM 101.

  Further, the ROM 101 stores a fluctuation pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine the fluctuation pattern to be one of a plurality of types. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation pattern determination tables that differ from each other in the types of variation patterns that can be determined in the variation pattern determination table, the respective determination rates, and the like. In the fluctuation pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR5 for fluctuation pattern determination is assigned to each fluctuation pattern. In other words, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation pattern determination tables that have different determination values (for example, the range or the number of determination values) assigned to at least one variation pattern of a plurality of types of variation patterns. There is. Note that, instead of the plurality of fluctuation pattern determination tables, one large fluctuation pattern determination table including the information of each fluctuation pattern determination table may be stored in the ROM 101.

  The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 3 may be a backup RAM that is partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot supply power). It In particular, at least the data according to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. Data according to the control state of the game control means, when the power is restored after the occurrence of a power outage, etc., the data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power outage (for example, a special figure Process flag). Further, the data according to the control state and the data showing the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data showing the progress state of the game.

  Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 10, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of a game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. There is. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 10 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 151B, a general figure reservation storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game. It is provided with a control timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155.

  The first special figure reservation storage unit 151A is a special figure game in which the game balls have passed through (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A and the first starting winning has occurred, but the game has not yet started ( Hold data (first special figure hold information) of the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates a winning number into the first starting winning opening (detection order of game balls) with a reservation number, and a random number is generated by the CPU 103 based on passage (entry) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 and the like are stored as reservation data (first special figure reservation information) until the number of storage reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The second special figure reservation storage unit 151B is a special figure game in which the game ball has passed (entered) through the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B and the second starting winning has occurred, but has not yet started. Hold data (second special figure hold information) of (second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B associates a winning number into the second start winning opening (detection order of game balls) with a reservation number, and a random number is generated by the CPU 103 based on the passage (entry) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 and the like are stored as reservation data (second special figure reservation information) until the number of storage reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  In addition, the holding data of the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A (first special figure hold information based on the establishment of the first start condition), and the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B The hold data (the second special figure hold information based on the establishment of the second start winning) may be stored in the common hold storage unit in association with the hold number.

  The general figure reservation storage unit 151C stores the reservation data regarding the general figure game that has not yet been started by the ordinary symbol display device 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. Information). For example, the public figure reservation storage unit 151C is associated with the reservation numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed through the passage gate 41, and based on the passage of the game balls, the CPU 103 extracts the general figure display result from the random number circuit 104 or the like. Numerical data or the like indicating the random number MR4 for use as reservation data (universal figure reservation information) is stored until the number of storage reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count value used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, in the game control counter setting unit 154, the first reserved storage number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter for counting the first special figure reserved storage number, and the second special figure reserved storage number. The second pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter for counting, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter for counting total pending storage number, and the like, Remembered.

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The I/O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 3 is an input port for capturing various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the production control board 12 provides a production control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores a production control program and fixed data, and a work area for the production control CPU 120. RAM 122, a display control unit 123 that executes a process for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120. A circuit 124 and an I/O 125 are mounted.

  As an example, in the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 121, whereby processing for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric components is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads out fixed data from the ROM 121 by a fixed data read operation, the effect control CPU 120 writes various variable data in the RAM 122 and temporarily stores the variable data, and the effect control CPU 120 writes in the RAM 122. A fluctuation data read operation for reading various temporarily stored fluctuation data, a reception operation in which the effect control CPU 120 receives an input of various signals from the outside of the effect control board 12 via the I/O 125, and an effect control CPU 120 performs an I/O operation. A transmission operation of outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

  To the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting an information signal (video signal) indicating an effect image to the image display device 5, and for transmitting an information signal (effect sound signal) indicating a command to the sound control board 13 are transmitted. Wiring, wiring for transmitting an information signal (illumination signal) indicating a command to the lamp control board 14, and the like are connected. Furthermore, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the operation operation of the player to the stick controller 31A is detected from the controller sensor unit 35A, and a game to the push button 31B. A wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that an operation action of a person is detected from the push sensor 35B is also connected.

  In the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random number values used for controlling the effect operation in an updatable manner. The random number used for controlling such a rendering operation is also referred to as a rendering random number.

  In the ROM 121 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. 3, various data used for controlling the progress of the game are stored in addition to the program for production control. For example, the ROM 121 stores data that configures a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, etc. prepared for the production control CPU 120 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings.

  For example, the ROM 121 stores a pending display mode determination table that is referred to in order to determine the display mode of the first pending display displayed in the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL to any one of a plurality of types. There is. Specifically, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of pending display mode determination tables that differ from each other in the types of display modes that can be determined in the pending display mode determination table, the respective determination rates, and the like. In the hold display mode determination table, a numerical value (decision value) that is compared with a random number value MR6 (not shown) for determining the display mode of the first hold display is assigned to each display mode of the first hold display. . Instead of the plurality of hold display mode determination tables, one large hold display mode determination table including information of all the hold display mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

  Further, for example, the ROM 121 stores a hold display mode determination table that is referred to in order to determine the display mode of the second hold display displayed in the second starting prize winning storage display area 5HR to any one of a plurality of types. Has been done. Specifically, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of pending display mode determination tables that differ from each other in the types of display modes that can be determined in the pending display mode determination table, the respective determination rates, and the like. In the hold display mode determination table, a numerical value (decision value) that is compared with a random number value MR6 (not shown) for determining the display mode of the second hold display is assigned to each display mode of the second hold display. . Instead of the plurality of hold display mode determination tables, one large hold display mode determination table including information of all the hold display mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

  Further, the ROM 121 stores a holding effect execution presence/absence determination table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute a holding effect (also referred to as an action effect or an on-hold change effect). Specifically, in the hold effect execution presence/absence determination table, a numerical value (decision value) that is compared with a random number value MR7 (not shown) for determining whether hold effect is executed or not is determined whether the hold effect is executed or not. Has been assigned. In the present embodiment, the hold effect refers to a pre-reading notice effect that changes the display mode of the hold display displayed in the first start winning award memory display area 5HL to a notice mode, and a second start winning award memory display area 5HR. This is a pre-reading notice effect that changes the display mode of the displayed hold display to the notice mode. There are a plurality of types of hold effects, and there is also a hold change effect in which a character or the like acts on the hold display in the display area of the image display device 5 to change the display mode of the hold display. In the hold change effect, there is a hold change effect that a character or the like acts on the hold display in the display area of the image display device 5, but does not change the display mode of the hold display.

  Further, the ROM 121 stores an active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute the active display change effect (success effect) that changes the special image including the active display. Specifically, the active display change execution presence/absence determination table is compared with a random value MR7 (not shown) for determining whether or not the active display change effect is executed, whether the active display change effect is executed or not. A numerical value (decision value) is assigned.

  In the present embodiment, the active display change effect is an effect (main notice effect) that changes the special image into a notice mode. In other words, the active display, the active display frame surrounding the active display, the information corresponding to the active display (for example, the active display or the characters or images displayed around the active display frame or around the active display frame) are used as the notice mode. It is a production (main announcement production) to be changed. As described above, in the active display change effect, the common effect, the success effect executed when changing the special image after executing the common effect (also referred to as active display change effect), and the common effect are executed. A failure effect (also referred to as an active display change gaze effect) that is executed later when the special image is not changed is included. The success effect is an effect that acts on the special image in the display area of the image display device 5 to change the display mode of the special image. On the other hand, the failure effect is an effect that does not change the display mode of the special image by not affecting the special image in the display area of the image display device 5, or a special effect that affects the special image in the display area of the image display device 5. It is an effect that does not change the display mode.

  In addition, the active display change effect includes a first system change effect that changes the special image mode to any one of a plurality of modes and a special image mode that changes the second system. And the 2nd system change production which changes to any one of a plurality of modes is included. The first system change effect includes a common effect, a success effect, and a failure effect corresponding to the first system change effect, and the second system change effect corresponds to the second system change effect. , Common production, success production, and failure production. In the present embodiment, the first system change effect is an effect that changes the display mode of the active display (active display displayed as a special image) in the special image, and the second system change effect is the special image. The effect is to change the display mode of the active display frame (active display frame displayed as a special image) inside.

  In addition, the ROM 121 refers to the first system change referred to for determining the execution timing of the first system change effect that is one of the active display change effects (the timing at which the change is executed). A performance execution timing determination table is stored. In the first system change effect, the rate at which the successful effect related to the first system change effect is executed varies depending on the execution timing of the first system change effect. Further, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of effect execution timing determination tables for the first system change effect, which are different from each other in the types of execution timings that can be determined in the execution timing determination table of the first system change effect, the respective determination rates, and the like. May be. In this execution timing determination table of the first system change effect, a numerical value (decision value) that is compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the first system change effect is assigned to each execution timing. There is. Further, in place of the execution timing determination tables of the plurality of first system change effects, one large execution timing determination table of the first system change effects is stored in the ROM 121, which includes information of the execution timing determination tables of all the first system change effects. May be stored.

  In addition, the second system change referred to in the ROM 121 for determining the execution timing (the timing of executing the second system change production, which is one of the active display change productions). A performance execution timing determination table is stored. In the second system change effect, the rate at which the successful effect related to the second system change effect is executed varies depending on the execution timing of the second system change effect. Further, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of second system change effect effect execution timing determination tables that differ from each other in the types of execution timings that can be determined in the second system change effect execution timing determination table and the respective determination rates. May be. In the execution timing determination table of the second system change effect, a numerical value (decision value) that is compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the second system change effect is assigned to each execution timing. There is. Further, in place of the plurality of second system change effect execution timing determination tables, one large second system change effect execution timing determination table including information of all the second system change effect execution timing determination tables is stored in the ROM 121. May be stored.

  It should be noted that the ROM 121 has a plurality of first system changes in which types of execution timings that can be determined in the execution timing determination table of the first system change effect and the execution timing determination table of the second system change effect, and respective determination ratios thereof are different from each other. The effect execution timing determination table of the effect and the execution timing determination table of the second system change effect may be stored as one large active display change effect execution timing determination table. In the execution timing determination table of the active display change effect, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the first system change effect and the second system at each execution timing. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the change effect, or a random number value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of both the first system change effect and the second system change effect A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with may be assigned. Further, instead of the execution timing determination tables of a plurality of active display change effects, one large active display change effect execution timing determination table including information of the execution timing determination tables of all active display change effects is stored in the ROM 121. Good.

  Further, the ROM 121 stores an active display change effect pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine the effect pattern (effect mode) of the active display change effect to one of a plurality of types. Specifically, in the effect pattern determination table of the active display change effect stored in the ROM 121, a random value (not shown) for determining the effect pattern of the active display change effect for each effect pattern of the active display change effect. The numerical value (decision value) to be compared with is assigned.

  It should be noted that the ROM 121 may store a hold change effect execution timing determination table that is referred to in order to determine the execution timing of the hold change effect (timing such as how many times the change is executed). Further, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of hold change effect execution timing determination tables in which types of execution timings that can be determined in the hold change effect execution timing determination table and respective determination rates are different from each other. In the hold change effect execution timing determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the hold change effect may be assigned to each execution timing. Further, instead of the plurality of hold change effect execution timing determination tables, one large hold change effect execution timing determination table including information of all hold change effect execution timing determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

The ROM 121 stores a main notice effect pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of effect patterns (effect modes) of the other main notice effects of the above-mentioned active display change effect. May be. In this case, specifically, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of main notice effect pattern determination tables in which the types of main notice effect patterns that can be determined in the main notice effect pattern determination table, the respective determination rates, and the like are different from each other. It suffices if the main notice production pattern determination table is assigned a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR9 (not shown) for determining the main notice production pattern for each of the main notice production patterns. Good.
Instead of the plurality of main notice effect pattern determination tables, one large main notice effect pattern determination table including information of all the main notice effect pattern determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

  It should be noted that the ROM 121 may store a hold change effect pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine an effect pattern (effect form) of the hold change effect from any of a plurality of types. In this case, in the ROM 121, in the hold change effect pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) that is compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the hold change effect pattern is assigned to each hold change effect pattern. Just do it.

  It should be noted that the ROM 121 may store a hold change gasse effect execution presence/absence determination table that is referred to for determining whether to execute the hold change gasse effect. In this case, in the hold change gasse effect execution presence/absence determination table, a numerical value (not shown) that is compared with a random value (not shown) for determining whether or not the hold change gasse effect is executed is determined whether or not the hold change gasse effect is executed. (Determined value) may be assigned.

  It should be noted that the ROM 121 may store a hold change gasse effect execution timing determination table that is referred to in order to determine the execution timing of the hold change gasse effect (timing such as how many times the change is executed). . In this case, the ROM 121 only needs to store a plurality of hold change gasse effect execution timing determination tables that differ from each other in the types of execution timings that can be determined in the hold change gasse effect execution timing determination table and the respective determination rates. . In this hold change gasse effect execution timing determination table, a numerical value (decision value) that is compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the hold change gasse effect may be assigned to each execution timing. . It should be noted that, instead of the plurality of hold change gasse effect execution timing determination tables, one large hold change gasse effect execution timing determination table including information of all the hold change gasse effect execution timing determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

  It should be noted that the ROM 121 may store a hold change gasse effect pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine the effect pattern (effect form) of the hold change gasse effect to one of a plurality of types. In this case, in the ROM 121, in the hold change gasse effect pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) that is compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the hold change gasse effect pattern is stored in each of the hold change gasse effect pattern. It may be assigned.

  Further, in the ROM 121, an active display mode determination table (also referred to as a “digest display mode determination table”) that is referred to for determining the display mode of the active display displayed in the active display area AHA to any one of a plurality of types. (Referred to) may be stored. In this case, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of active display display mode determination tables that differ from each other in the types of display modes that can be determined in the active display display mode determination table, the respective determination rates, and the like. In the display mode determination table of active display, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the display mode of active display may be assigned to each display mode of active display. That is, in the ROM 121, a plurality of display modes of active display having different determination values (for example, a range or number of determination values) assigned to at least one display mode among a plurality of types of active display. It suffices if the decision table is stored. Instead of the display mode determination tables for a plurality of active displays, one large active display mode determination table including information of all active display mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

  In addition, in the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 effects by various effect devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the first lamp 9, the information display portion 51, the second lamp 52, the drive mechanism 53, the versatile light 54, etc.). Data and the like which configure a plurality of effect control patterns used for controlling the motion are stored. By setting the effect control pattern, various variable display operations such as a decorative pattern and advance notice effects (including prefetch advance notice effects) are realized.

  The various effect control patterns are made up of data indicating the control contents of various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the effect control pattern corresponds to a plurality of types of variation patterns, in the period from the start of variation of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the definite display of the fixed special symbol that is the special symbol display result is displayed. Variable display operation of symbols, reach effect, effect operation in re-lottery effect, or various effect operations without variable display of decorative symbols (for example, hold for display mode of hold display in first start winning prize memory display area 5HL) Effect, and hold effect for the display mode of the hold display in the second start winning prize memory display area 5HR), and the like, and the like, and the like, and the like, which are configured to include data indicating the control contents of various effect operations.

  FIG. 11A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. The production control pattern is composed of control data for controlling various production operations such as production control process timer determination value, display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, end code, and the like, It suffices that the contents of various kinds of effect control, the switching timing of effect control, etc. are set in time series. In addition, the effect control pattern may include, for example, movable member control data that specifies the content of operation control of a movable member provided inside or outside the game area. The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the effect control process timer (effect control process timer value) provided in a predetermined area of the effect control RAM built in the effect control microcomputer 120. ), the determination value corresponding to the execution time (effect time) of each effect operation is set in advance. Instead of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 11, and a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control microcomputer 120. Data indicating switching timing of effect control may be set in correspondence with predetermined control content or processing content such as that.

  The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the display control data is data that specifies the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5. The voice control data includes data indicating a voice output mode from the speaker 8, such as data indicating an output mode of effect sound or the like linked to the variable display operation of the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the voice control data is data that specifies the voice output operation from the speaker 8. The lamp control data includes, for example, data indicating the light emitting operation mode of the first lamp 9 (light emitter). That is, the lamp control data is data that specifies the light emitting operation (lighting operation, blinking operation, extinguishing operation) of the first lamp 9. The operation detection control data includes, for example, data indicating a period during which an operation on the operation unit such as the operation button 30 is effectively detected, the control content of the effect operation when the operation is effectively detected, and the like. That is, the operation detection control data is data that specifies the effect operation according to the operation on the operation unit. In addition, in the production control pattern, for example, the display contents of the information display unit 51 (first reserved display 51A, second reserved display 51B, character display 51C, fourth symbol display 51D and fourth symbol display 51E (Display contents), display control data that specifies the light emission operation of the second lamp 52, drive control data that specifies the drive operation of the drive mechanism 53, and the light emission operation of the LED group 545 of the versa lighter 54. Includes lamp control data, etc. It should be noted that these control data need not be included in all the effect control patterns, and an effect control pattern configured to include some control data according to the content of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be.

  FIG. 11B is a diagram for explaining various effect operations executed according to the content of the effect control pattern. The effect control CPU 120 determines the control content of the effect operation according to various control data included in the effect control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches any of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative design is displayed in a mode specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination value, and the character is displayed. Control is performed to display an effect image such as an image or a background image on the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, the control for outputting the sound from the speaker 8 in the mode specified by the voice control data is performed, and the control for causing the first lamp 9 to emit light in the mode specified by the lamp control data is performed by the operation detection control data. During the effective operation period, the control for accepting the operation on the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B and determining the effect contents is performed. In addition, the display control of the information display unit 51 is performed in the manner designated by the display control data, the control for causing the second lamp 52 and the LED group 545 to emit light is performed in the manner designated by the lamp control data, and the designation is made by the drive control data. The control for driving the drive mechanism 53 is performed in this manner. It should be noted that dummy data (data that does not specify control) may be set in the data corresponding to the effect parts that are not controlled even though they correspond to the effect control process timer determination value.

  The production operation shown in FIG. 11(B) corresponds to the entire period from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern to the final stop, but the present invention is not limited to this, and during the variable display of the decorative pattern. An effect control pattern for executing the effect operation may be provided corresponding to a part of the period (for example, the period for performing the notice effect). Alternatively, in order to execute the production operation in correspondence with a predetermined period other than the variable display of the decorative pattern (for example, a period during which a round is being executed in the big hit game state, a period in which an ending effect is executed at the end of the big hit game state, etc.) Effect control pattern may be provided.

  When setting the production control pattern, the pattern data forming the corresponding production control pattern may be read from the ROM 121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the pattern data forming the corresponding production control pattern may be read. The storage address in the ROM 121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 and the read position of the storage data in the ROM 121 may be designated. After that, each time the performance control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the performance control process timer determination values, and if it matches, the performance operation according to various corresponding control data. Control. As described above, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect device (the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the first lamp) according to the contents of the process data #1 to the process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. 9, control of movable members included in the production model) is advanced. In each process data #1 to process data #n, display control data #1 to display control data #n and voice control data #1 to voice control associated with the effect control process timer determination values #1 to #n. Data #n, lamp control data #1 to lamp control data #n, and operation detection control data #1 to operation detection control data #n show the control contents of the effect operation in the effect device and specify the execution of effect control. Control execution data #1 to effect control execution data #n are configured.

  A command according to the effect control pattern set in this way is sent from the effect control CPU 120 to the display control unit 123, the voice control board 13, the first lamp control board 14, the display drive unit 16, the second lamp drive unit 17, and the accessory drive unit. It is output to 18, etc. In the display control unit 123 that has received the command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like causes the image data indicated by the command to be read from an image data memory such as CGROM and temporarily stored in the VRAM to be expanded. Further, in the voice control board 13 that receives the command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, the voice synthesizing IC reads the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores it in the voice RAM or the like for development. .

  In the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 3, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation, for example, an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 12A. Is provided. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 12A includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194. There is.

  The effect control flag setting unit 191 has a plurality of types in which the state can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the effect image display state on the screen of the image display device 5 or the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the operation of displaying an effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating a timer value for each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the present embodiment, the data forming the first start-up winning prize reception command buffer 194A as shown in FIG. 12B is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The first start prize-winning reception command buffer 194A is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value of the total number of reserved memories (eg, “4”). . When there is a starting winning prize to the first starting winning a prize mouth, a starting mouth winning designation command (first starting mouth winning designation command), a symbol designating command, a variable category command, a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command) 4) is set as one set and transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the first start winning prize reception command buffer 194A, of these commands, a storage area is ensured so that a symbol designating command, a variation category command, and a first reserved storage number notification command can be stored in association with each other.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores the commands in the order received at the time of the first start winning a prize from the beginning in the empty area of the first start winning award reception command buffer 194A. At the time of the first start winning a prize, the command transmission is performed in the order of the first starting award winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the first reserved storage number notification command. Therefore, if the command reception is normally performed, as shown in FIG. 12B, in the storage area corresponding to each of the buffer numbers “1” to “4”, the starting mouth winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the fluctuation The category command and the first reserved storage number notification command are stored in this order. In FIG. 12B, the commands are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “3”.

  The commands stored in the first start prize-winning reception command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 12B are deleted one by one each time the variable display of decorative symbols is started in synchronization with the first special figure game, Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (winning order of commands). Specifically, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started in synchronization with the first special figure game, the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands associated with the first starting opening winning award designation command is displayed. One stored command (1 set) is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (corresponding to the first start mouth winning award designation command) Command) is shifted while maintaining the winning order (the relationship of the buffer numbers).

  For example, when the variable display of the decorative design is started in synchronization with the first special figure game in the storage state shown in FIG. 12B, the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “1” is deleted. , The command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the buffer number “1”, and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “3” becomes the buffer number “2”. Be shifted.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the data forming the second start-winning-at-receipt command buffer 194B as shown in FIG. 12C is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The second start prize-winning reception command buffer 194B is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value of the total number of reserved memories (eg, “4”). .. When there is a starting winning prize to the second starting winning a prize mouth, a starting mouth winning designation command (second starting mouth winning designation command), a symbol designating command, a variable category command, a reserved storage number notification command (a second reserved storage number notification command) ) Is set as one set and transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the second start winning award reception command buffer 194B, a storage area is secured so that a symbol designating command, a variation category command, and a reserved storage number notification command among these commands can be stored in association with each other.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores the commands in the order received at the time of the second start winning a prize from the beginning in the empty area of the second start winning award reception command buffer 194B. At the time of the second starting winning, the command transmission is performed in the order of the second starting winning award designating command, the symbol designating command, the variation category command, and the reserved storage number notification command. Therefore, if the command is normally received, as shown in FIG. 12C, in the storage area corresponding to each of the buffer numbers “1” to “4”, the second start mouth winning designation command, the symbol designation command , The variable category command, and the pending storage number notification command are stored in this order. Note that in FIG. 12C, the command is stored in the storage area corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “2”.

  The commands stored in the second start prize-winning reception command buffer 194B shown in FIG. 12C are deleted one by one each time the variable display of the decorative design is started in synchronization with the second special figure game, Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (winning order of commands). Specifically, when the variable display of the decorative design is started in synchronization with the second special drawing game, the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number of the commands associated with the second starting opening winning award designation command is displayed. One stored command (one set) is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (corresponding to the second start mouth winning award designation command) Command) is shifted while maintaining the winning order (the relationship of the buffer numbers).

  For example, when the variable display of the decorative design is started in synchronization with the second special drawing game in the storage state shown in FIG. 12C, the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “1” is deleted. , The command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the buffer number “1”.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, data forming the first prefetching notice buffer 194C as shown in FIG. 12D is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The first look-ahead notice buffer 194C is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1" to "4") corresponding to each data forming the first start prize-winning reception command buffer 194A. That is, the first read-ahead notice buffer 194C stores the determination content regarding the read-ahead notice effect related to each holding information determined by the effect control CPU 120 and the like in association with the buffer numbers "1" to "4". To be done. When the hold data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the first start-up winning command buffer 194A of FIG. 12B due to the start of variable display of the decorative pattern, In the first prefetching notice buffer 194C, the contents associated with the buffer number are also deleted. Further, due to the start of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reserved data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is received in the other buffer in the first start winning prize reception command buffer 194A of FIG. 12B. When the number is shifted to a number, the contents associated with the buffer number in the first prefetching notice buffer 194C are also shifted to the other buffer number.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, data forming the second prefetching notice buffer 194D as shown in FIG. 12E is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The second pre-reading notice buffer 194D is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer numbers "1" to "4") corresponding to each data forming the second start prize-winning reception command buffer 194B. That is, the second pre-reading notice buffer 194D stores the determination content regarding the pre-reading notice production related to each holding information determined by the production control CPU 120 or the like in association with the buffer numbers "1" to "4". To be done. When the hold data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the second start winning prize reception command buffer 194B of FIG. 12C due to the start of variable display of the decorative pattern, In the second prefetching notice buffer 194D, the contents associated with the buffer number are also deleted. Further, due to the start of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reserved data (1 set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is received in another buffer in the second start winning prize reception command buffer 194B of FIG. 12C. When the number is shifted to a number, the contents associated with the buffer number in the second prefetching notice buffer 194D are also shifted to the other buffer number.

  The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 3 displays on the image display device 5 under the control of the effect control CPU 120 (for example, based on a display control command from the effect control CPU 120). The video signal of the effect image is output and the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. As an example, the display control unit 123 may include a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like. The VDP may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or a microprocessor for image processing, which is more commonly called a DSP (Digital Signal Processor). The CGROM may be a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, or a non-volatile recording medium such as a magnetic memory or an optical memory. It may be configured. For example, the effect control CPU 120 transmits to the display control unit 123 a display control command that specifies an effect image to be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 according to the display control data included in the effect control pattern. In accordance with the display control command from the effect control CPU 120, the display control unit 123 uses the data stored in the CGROM or the like (storage unit) to display a video signal for displaying the effect image specified by the display control command. Is output. As a result, the video signal of the effect image according to the control of the effect control CPU 120 (control based on the effect control pattern or the like) is output, and the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. Become.

  The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 is, for example, an input port for receiving a performance control command transmitted from the main board 11 or the like, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the performance control board 12. It is configured to include and. For example, from the output port of the I/O 125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, a control signal (sound effect signal) transmitted to the sound control board 13, and a first lamp control board 14 are transmitted. Output control signal, control signal transmitted to each of the display drive unit 16, the second lamp drive unit 17, and the accessory drive unit 18 (or the third lamp drive unit 541) via the relay board 19 and the like. To be done. The control signal is supplied as a serial signal.

  The image display device 5 includes a display panel such as a liquid crystal panel and a driver circuit that drives the display panel. The video signal supplied from the display control unit 123 to the image display device 5 via the I/O 125 under the control of the effect control CPU 120 is input to the driver circuit. The driver circuit drives the display panel based on the input video signal to display the image represented by the video signal on the display panel. As a result, various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described.

  In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing which is game control main processing. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 makes necessary initialization after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this initial setting, the RAM 102 is cleared, for example. In addition, register setting of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. As a result, thereafter, the interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, the interrupt is permitted and then the loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed and then the loop process may be entered.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 13 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, and thereby the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S11). Then, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S12). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information, etc. supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 are output (steps). S13).

  Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as the random number values MR1 to MR5 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S14). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S15). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol. Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the display operation of the display device 4B and the opening/closing operation setting of the special winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S16). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on and off of the segment LED, etc.) on the ordinary symbol display device 20 by executing the ordinary symbol process processing, and the variable display of the ordinary symbol and the movable in the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B. It enables the setting of tilting motion of winglets.

  After executing the normal symbol process process, the CPU 103 executes a command control process to transmit a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, one of the output ports included in the I/O 105 corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table designated by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, the production control After setting the control data to the output port for transmitting the production control command to the substrate 12, set the predetermined control data to the output port of the production control INT signal to turn on the production control INT signal for the predetermined time. It is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table by turning off from the off state. After executing the command control process, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated after setting the interrupt enable state.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S15 shown in FIG. 13 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S101 of FIG. 14 as the start winning determination processing. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S208 and step S211 of FIG. 15 as the start winning process. FIG. 17A is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S220 of FIG. 16 as the winning random number determination process.

  In the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 15, the CPU 103 first determines the first based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether the starting opening switch 22A is turned on (step S201). At this time, if the first starting opening switch 22A is turned on (step S201; Yes), the first special figure reservation storage number (the first special figure game reservation number) is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, as the upper limit storage number). It is determined whether or not it is "4") (step S202). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the first special figure reservation storage number by reading the first reservation storage number count value, which is the stored value of the first reservation storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. When the first special figure reservation storage number is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; No), for example, the stored value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "1" ( Step S207).

  When the first starting opening switch 22A is off in step S201 (step S201; No), when the first special figure reservation storage number has reached the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; Yes), After executing the processing of step S209, based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning port formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the second starting port switch 22B. It is determined whether or not is on (step S203). At this time, if the second starting opening switch 22B is turned on (step S203; Yes), the second special figure reservation storage number (second special figure game reservation number) is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, as the upper limit storage number). “4”) is determined (step S204). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the second special figure reservation storage number by reading the second reservation storage number count value, which is the stored value of the second reservation storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. When the second special figure reservation storage number is not the upper limit value in step S204 (step S204; No), for example, the stored value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "2" ( Step S210).

  After executing the processing of step S207, the processing for starting winning (FIG. 16) is executed (step S208), the value stored in the starting opening buffer is set to “0 (initialization)” (step S209), and the processing of step S203. Proceed to. After the process of step S210 is executed, the process for starting winning a prize (FIG. 16) is executed (step S211), the value stored in the starting mouth buffer is set to “0 (initialization)” (step S212), and the winning a prize determination process is started. To finish. Thereby, even when the first winning opening switch 22A and the second starting opening switch 22B simultaneously detect the starting winning of the game ball, the processing based on the respective detections can be completed.

  The CPU 103 updates the number of special figure reservation storages corresponding to the starting mouth buffer value, which is the value stored in the starting mouth buffer, by adding 1 as the starting winning process (steps S208 and S211) (step S215 of FIG. 16). . For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. Further, the second reserved storage number count value is updated so as to be incremented by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. Subsequent to the processing of step S215, the total pending storage number is updated so as to be incremented by 1 (step S216). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, may be updated so as to be incremented by 1.

  After executing the process of step S216, the CPU 103 determines the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154. Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for determining the variable category and the random number MR3 for determining the variation category are extracted (step S217). Numerical data indicating each random number value thus extracted is stored by being set as reservation information at the head of an empty entry in the special figure reservation storage unit 151 corresponding to the starting port buffer value (step S218). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are set in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are set in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B. At this time, when the numerical data is set in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, the CPU 103 controls the first reservation indicator 25A and can specify the first special figure reservation storage number incremented by one. The first hold display is made to be displayed on the first hold display 25A (for example, the number of red-lighted LEDs is increased by 1). When the numerical data is set in the second special figure pending storage unit, the CPU 103 controls the second pending indicator 25B to specify the second special figure pending storage number incremented by one. The hold display is made to be displayed on the second hold indicator 25B (for example, the number of LEDs lit in blue is increased by 1). The processing of the first hold display and the second hold display may be performed in step S215, for example.

  Following the processing of step S218, the transmission setting of the starting mouth winning designation command according to the starting mouth buffer value is performed (step S219). For example, when the starting mouth buffer value is “1”, the storage address of the first starting mouth winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. The setting for transmitting the first starting opening winning award designation command to 12 is performed. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is “2”, by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning award designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, the effect control board 12 is notified. The setting for transmitting the second start opening winning award designation command is performed. The starting mouth winning designation command thus set is, for example, after the special symbol process processing is completed, the command control processing of step S17 shown in FIG. Is transmitted.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S219, a winning random number determination processing is executed (step S220). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the reservation storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the reservation storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Settings are performed (step S221). The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. Is transmitted.

  As the winning random number determination process (step S220), the CPU 103 confirms the state of the time saving flag or the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 or the like, for example, to determine the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is specified (step S401 in FIG. 17A). The CPU 103 identifies the probability variation state when the probability variation flag is on, identifies the time variation state when the probability variation flag is off and the time reduction flag is on, and both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are off. Sometimes it is necessary to specify that it is in a normal state.

  Following the processing of step S401, the starting mouth buffer value (“1” or “2”) and the current data are determined from the table data forming the first special figure display result determination table 130A or the second special figure display result determination table 130B. The special figure display result determination table data used for determining the special figure display result is selected corresponding to the gaming state (step S402). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the first special figure display result determination table 130A is set in the usage table. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the second special figure display result determination table 130B is set in the usage table. After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step S217 of FIG. 16 is within the predetermined jackpot determination range (step S403). In the jackpot determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special jackpot display result of "big hit" in the special figure display result determination table data selected in the process of step S402 are set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and each value. It suffices to be able to determine the presence or absence of a decision value that matches the random number value MR1 by comparing the decision values one by one. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination values included in the big hit determination range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number MR1 and the minimum or maximum value of the big hit determination range. It suffices to be able to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it is determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random number value MR1 is determined to be “jack” (big hit start determination). it can.

  When it is determined in step S403 that it is not within the big hit determination range (step S403; No), it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (step S403). S404). The CPU 103 executes the same process as in the case of the big hit determination range for the decision value assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit" in the special figure display result determination table data selected in the process of step S402. Therefore, it is sufficient to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the small hit determination range. When it is determined in step S404 that it is not within the small hit determination range (step S404; No), a symbol designating command corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “miss” is given to the effect control board 12. Settings for transmission are performed (step S405).

  When it is determined in step S404 that it is within the small hit determination range (step S404; Yes), a symbol designating command corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “small hit” is given to the effect control board 12. Settings are made for transmission (step S407).

  When it is determined in step S403 that the jackpot is within the jackpot determination range (step S403; Yes), the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step S409). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the variation special map (“first special map” corresponding to “1” or “second special map” corresponding to “2”) specified in correspondence with the starting opening buffer value. From the table data forming the jackpot type determination table 131, the jackpot type determination table data is selected. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined. The setting for transmitting the symbol designating command according to the determination result by the process of step S409 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S410).

  After performing any of the processes of steps S405, S407, and S410, the variation category is determined (step S412). That is, the variation category is determined to be one of the plurality of types shown in FIG. In the process of step S412, the CPU 103 determines a plurality of variation category determination tables stored in the ROM 101 (a plurality of types of variation categories having different types of variation categories that can be determined in the variation category determination table, respective determination rates, etc.). Table), select any variable category determination table to be set as a use table.

  Specifically, the CPU 103 causes the special figure display result (for example, the determination result of step S403 or step S404) or the number of reserved memories (for example, the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154). One of the variable category determination tables to be set as the usage table is selected based on the stored value such as the first reserved storage number count value). Subsequently, the CPU 103 creates a variation category determination table set as a usage table and numerical data indicating a variation category determination random number MR3 extracted from, for example, the random number circuit 104 or the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154. Based on this, one of the plurality of types of variation categories is determined.

  FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of selection of the variation category determination table. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the variation category determination table. The configuration example of this variation category determination table is four types of variation category tables that are referenced to determine one of a plurality of variation categories. FIG. 19A shows a configuration example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” of one of the four types described above. FIG. 19B shows a configuration example of another type of variation category determination table “C-TBL2”. FIG. 19C shows a configuration example of yet another type of variation category determination table “C-TBL3”. FIG. 19D shows a configuration example of yet another type of variation category determination table “C-TBL4”. For simplification of description, the variation category determination table in which the determination rate shown in FIG. 19(A) is set may be simply referred to as the variation category determination table in FIG. 19(A). The same applies to FIGS. 19B to 19D and other determination tables such as the variation pattern determination table. FIG. 18 is a selection of selecting one of the four variation category determination tables (“C-TBL1” to “C-TBL4”) of FIGS. 19A to 19D. Here is an example.

  In the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” of FIG. 19A, a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation category is assigned to a plurality of types of variation categories PA1 to PA5. Regarding the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 19B, the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” in FIG. 19C, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” in FIG. 19D. Is also the same.

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 19A, 0 of the 100 determination values (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random number MR3 is the variation category. 70 (values in the range of "0" to "69") are assigned to "PA1", and 27 (values in the range of "70" to "96") are assigned to variation category "PA2". “PA3” is assigned, two (values in the range of “97” to “98”) are assigned to the variation category “PA4”, and one (value “99”) is assigned to the variation category “PA5”. There is. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table "C-TBL1" in FIG. 19A, the variation category "PA1" is 0% (0/100), the variation category "PA2" is 70% (70/100), The variation category "PA3" is determined at a rate of 27% (27/100), the variation category "PA4" is 2% (2/100), and the variation category "PA5" is 1% (1/100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 19B, four out of 100 (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the determined value of the random number value MR3 (“0”). ”To “3” range) is assigned to the variation category “PA1”, 85 pieces (values in the “4” to “88” range) are assigned to the variation category “PA2”, and 8 pieces (“89”). ”To “96”) is assigned to the variation category “PA3”, two (values in the range “97” to “98”) to the variation category “PA4”, and one (value “value”). 99”) is assigned to the variation category “PA5”. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 19B, the variation category “PA1” is 4% (4÷100), the variation category “PA2” is 85% (85÷100), The variation category “PA3” is determined at a rate of 8% (8÷100), the variation category “PA4” at 2% (2÷100), and the variation category “PA5” at a rate of 1% (1÷100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” in FIG. 19C, 64 (“0” of 100 determined values of the random number MR3 (values in the range of “0” to “99”)) are set. ”To “63”) is assigned to the variation category “PA1”, 25 (values in the range “64” to “88”) are assigned to the variation category “PA2”, and 8 (“89”). ] To "96") is assigned to the variation category "PA3", two (values in the range "97" to "98") are assigned to the variation category "PA4", and one (value "value" 99”) is assigned to the variation category “PA5”. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” in FIG. 19C, the variation category “PA1” is 64% (64÷100), the variation category “PA2” is 25% (25÷100), The variation category “PA3” is determined at a rate of 8% (8÷100), the variation category “PA4” at 2% (2÷100), and the variation category “PA5” at a rate of 1% (1÷100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” of FIG. 19D, 20 (“0” of 100 determined values of the random number MR3 (values in the range of “0” to “99”)) ”To “19”) are assigned to the variation category “PB3”, 40 (values in the range “20” to “59”) are assigned to the variation category “PB4”, and 40 (“60”). "To a value in the range of "99") is assigned to the variation category "PB5". That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” in FIG. 19D, the variation category “PB3” is 20% (20÷100), the variation category “PB4” is 40% (40÷100), The variation category “PB5” is determined at a rate of 40% (40÷100).

  In the setting examples of the variation category determination tables of FIGS. 19A to 19C, when the special figure display result is “miss”, when the number of pending storages is large, compared to when the number of pending storages is small, The decision rate of the shortened/non-reach (miss) variation category (variation category “PA1”) is increased. Specifically, the determination rate “64%” of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” selected when the special figure display result is “miss” and the number of pending storages is “4”. > When the special map display result is “miss” and the number of pending storage is “3” or “2”, the determination rate “4%” of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” > The determination rate of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” selected when the special figure display result is “miss” and the number of pending storages is “1” is “0%”.

  In addition, in the setting example of the variation category determination table in FIGS. 19A to 19C, when the special figure display result is “miss”, the super reach (miss) is generated regardless of whether the number of pending storage is large or small. ) Of the variation category (variation category “PA4” or variation category “PA5”) is fixed. Specifically, in any of the variation category determination table "C-TBL1", the variation category determination table "C-TBL2", and the variation category determination table "C-TBL3", the determination rate of the variation category "PA5" is " 1%” and the determination rate of the variation category “PA4” is “2%”.

  Further, in the setting example of the variation category determination table of FIGS. 19A to 19C, the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, the variation category determination table “C- In either case of "TBL3", there is a determined value of the random number value MR3 that corresponds to the same (common) variation category (the same variation category is determined). That is, if the determined value of the random number value MR3 is a certain value, it is either the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, or the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”. Also, the same variation category is determined. For example, when the determined value of the random number value MR3 is "99", it is one of the variation category determination table "C-TBL1", the variation category determination table "C-TBL2", and the variation category determination table "C-TBL3". Also, the variation category “PA5” is determined. Further, when the determined value of the random number value MR3 is a value in the range of "97" to "98", the variation category "PA4" is determined in any of the above variation category determination tables.

  Further, when the determined value of the random number value MR3 is a value in the range of "89" to "96", the variation category "PA3" is determined in any of the above variation category determination tables. Further, when the determined value of the random number value MR3 is a value in the range of “64” to “69”, the variation category “PA2” is determined in any of the above variation category determination tables. As a result, if the determined value of the random number value MR3 is a certain value (a value in each range described above), it is determined that the reach, the super reach, the super reach α, or the super reach β is performed in advance. It can be easily determined. Therefore, it is possible to notify them before the variable display corresponding to the start winning, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game. In the setting examples of FIGS. 19A to 19C, when the determined value of the random number value MR3 is a value in the range of “0” to “69”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, In either of the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”, the variation category “PA1” or “PA2” is determined. This makes it possible to easily determine in advance that at least the reach is not reached.

  After that, according to the determination result (determination result) of the process of step S412, after setting for transmitting any of the variation category commands shown in FIG. 17B to the production control board 12 (step S413), the winning random number determination process ends.

  After executing the start winning determination process in step S101 of FIG. 14, the CPU 103 selects one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. Then run.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0". In this special symbol normal processing, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is "big hit" or "small hit" is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Done. In the special symbol normal processing, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is predetermined. The special symbol normal processing will be described later.

  The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting processing includes processing for determining the fluctuation pattern as one of a plurality of types shown in FIG. 7, a first fluctuation start command (or second fluctuation start command), a fluctuation pattern designation command, and a variable display result notification command. It includes a send setting process for sending etc. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variable display of the special symbol is started, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2". The setting of the fluctuation pattern will be described later.

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation process, the setting process for changing the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol It includes the process of measuring. For example, every time the special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed, the special symbol variation timer value which is the stored value in the special symbol variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153 is subtracted from or added to 1, It is the first special figure game (special figure game using the first special figure) by the 1 special symbol display device 4A, or the second special figure game (special feature using the second special figure) by the second special symbol display device 4B. A common timer measures elapsed time regardless of whether the game is a (figure game). Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In this way, the special symbol variation process of step S112 may be a process of controlling the variation of the special symbol in the first special figure game or the second special figure game by a common processing routine. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3".

  The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the variation of the special symbol is stopped on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the fixed special symbol which is the variable display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (deriving). It includes a process for making settings for the setting. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is turned on. If the big hit flag is turned on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". To be done. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the small hit flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

  The big hit opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". In this big hit opening pre-processing, based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit", there is a processing to start the execution of the round in the big hit game state and set the big winning opening to the open state. include. At this time, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the special winning opening is opened may be set depending on whether the big hit type is “non-probable change”, “probable change”, or “probability”. As an example, the big hit type corresponds to "non-probability change" or "probability change", the upper limit of the period for which the special winning opening is opened is set to "29 seconds", and the maximum winning number is the maximum number of times to execute the round. By setting the number of times the mouth is opened to "15 times", it is sufficient to set the normal open big hit state. On the other hand, when the jackpot type corresponds to "probability", the upper limit of the period for which the special winning opening is opened is set to "0.1 seconds", and the number of opening of the special winning opening is the upper limit of the number of rounds to be executed. By setting "15 times", the short-time open big hit state may be set. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5".

  The big hit opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, and the big winning opening based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the open state from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6". ..

  The post-big hit opening process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This big hit opening post processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round to open the special winning opening has reached the maximum winning opening maximum number of times, reached the maximum winning opening maximum value In this case, a process for making settings for transmitting a big hit end designation command is included. When the number of rounds executed has not reached the maximum winning opening maximum number, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the maximum winning opening maximum number is reached, the special drawing is opened. The value of the process flag is updated to "7".

  The big hit ending process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". In this big hit ending process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect is executed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state by the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the first lamp 9, etc. It includes a process of waiting until an elapse, a process of performing various settings for starting the probability variation control and the time saving control in response to the end of the big hit game state. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

  The small hit opening pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". The small hit opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the big winning opening in the small hit game state based on the variable display result being "small hit". As an example, when the variable display result is "small hit", the upper limit of the period for which the special winning opening is open is set as in the case where the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability". It is only necessary to set "0.1 seconds" and to set the number of times of opening the special winning opening to "15 times" to set the small hitting game state. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9".

  The small hitting open process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small hit opening process is the process of measuring the elapsed time after opening the big winning opening and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time etc. A process for determining whether or not it is included is included. When returning the special winning opening to the closed state, a process of stopping the supply of the drive signal to the special winning opening door solenoid 82 may be executed. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10".

  The small hit ending process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". In this small hitting end processing, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a production operation for informing the end of the small hitting game state is executed by the production device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the first lamp 9 or the like elapses. It includes the process of waiting until. Here, when the small hit game state ends, the state of the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are not changed, and the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S110 of FIG. 14 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 20, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol reservation storage number is "0" (step S231). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second special figure game is held. For example, in the process of step S231, the second hold storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be read and it may be determined whether or not the read value is "0".

  When the number of the second special figure reservation storage is other than "0" in step S231 (step S231; No), the reservation stored corresponding to the reservation number "1" in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B. As the data, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type are read out (step S232). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, stored in a random number buffer for fluctuation.

  Following the process of step S232, the second special figure pending storage number is updated by subtracting 1 from the second pending storage number counting value, and the second special figure pending storage number is also updated The reservation data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number “1” (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers “2” to “4”) in the unit 151B are shifted upward by one entry. Yes (step S233). Further, in the process of step S233, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be updated so that the total reserved storage number count value stored in the total reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1. At this time, the value of the variable special map designation buffer, which is the value stored in the variable special figure designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step S234).

  When the second special figure reservation storage number is "0" in step S231 (step S231; Yes), it is determined whether the first special figure reservation storage number is "0" (step S235). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first special figure game is held. For example, in the process of step S235, the game control counter setting unit 154 reads the first reserved storage number count value stored by the first reserved storage number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is "0". Good.

  In this way, the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the number of second special figure pending storage is “0”, so that the first special figure game and the second special figure game are executed. When the figure game and the special game are suspended, the second special figure game is executed with priority over the first special figure game. It should be noted that the second special figure game is not limited to the mode (so-called special figure 2 priority digestion) executed with priority over the first special figure game, and the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) ) Is entered (passed) by the game ball and the special prize game (first special prize game, second special prize game) is executed in the order in which the start prize (first start prize, second start prize) is generated. It may be done (so-called winning order digestion). In this case, it suffices to provide a table for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the start winning is generated, and to determine which of the first special figure game and the second special figure game is to be executed from the stored data. Alternatively, the second special figure game and the first special figure game may be executed in parallel (so-called simultaneous fluctuation).

  When the number of the first special figure reservation storage is other than "0" in step S235 (step S235; No), the reservation stored corresponding to the reservation number "1" in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A. As the data, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type are read out (step S236). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored by being stored in, for example, a fluctuation random number buffer.

  Following the process of step S236, the first special figure reserved storage number is updated by subtracting 1 from the first reserved storage number count value and updated, and the first special figure reserved storage is also updated. The reservation data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number “1” (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers “2” to “4”) in the unit 151A are shifted upward by one entry. Yes (step S237). Further, in the process of step S237, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be updated so as to subtract 1 from the total reserved storage number count value stored in the total reserved storage number counter. At this time, the fluctuation special map designation buffer value is updated to "1" (step S238).

  After performing either of the processing of steps S234 and S238, as a use table for determining whether the special symbol display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol is "big hit" or "miss", Similar to the processing of step S402 shown in 17(A), the special figure display result determination table data is selected (step S239). That is, in the process of step S402, the first special figure display result determination table 130A or the second special figure display result determination table 130B is set in the use table according to the starting opening buffer value (“1” or “2”). In the process of step S239, if the variation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the first special figure display result determination table 130A is set in the use table, and the variation special figure designation buffer value is "2". In this case, the second special figure display result determination table 130B may be set in the use table. Then, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for variation is assigned to the special figure display results of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “miss”. By comparing with the value, it is determined which of the "big hit", the "small hit" and the "miss" is given to the special figure display result (step S240).

  After the special figure display result is determined in step S240, it is determined whether the special figure display result is a "big hit" (step S241). Then, if it is determined that the "big hit" (step S241; Yes), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the ON state (step S242). At this time, the jackpot type determination table 131 is selected and set as a use table for determining the jackpot type to any of a plurality of types (step S243). By referring to the jackpot type determination table 131 thus set, the numerical data indicating the jackpot type determining random number value MR2 stored in the random number buffer for variation is changed to "indeterminate change", "probable change", or "probability". Depending on which of the determination values assigned to each jackpot type matches, one of the plurality of jackpot types is determined (step S244).

  In accordance with the jackpot type thus determined, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value that is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (step S245), the jackpot type determined Memorize As an example, if the big hit type is "non-probable change", the big hit type buffer value may be "0", if it is "probable change", it may be "1", and if it is "probable", it may be "2".

  When it is determined in step S241 that it is not a "big hit" (step S241; No), it is determined whether the special figure display result is a "small hit" (step S246). Then, when it is determined to be a "small hit" (step S246; Yes), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (step S247).

  If it is determined in step S246 that it is not a "small hit" (step S246; No), or after performing any of the processing of steps S245 and S247, whether to control to the big hit game state or the small hit game state Predetermination result of whether or not, further, corresponding to the determination result of the big hit type in the case of a big hit game state, set a fixed special symbol (step S248).

  After setting the confirmed special symbol in step S248, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" which is a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S249), and the special symbol normal process is ended. . If the number of pending storage of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" in step S235 (step S235; Yes), after performing a predetermined demo display setting (step S250), the special symbol Normal processing ends. In this demo display setting, for example, a production control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined production image on the image display device 5 is controlled from the main board 11. It is determined whether it has been transmitted to the board 12. At this time, if it has been transmitted, the demo display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo designation command is performed, and then the demo display setting ends.

  In the variation pattern setting process of step S111, the CPU 103 selects the variation category random number MR3 and the variation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR5 is extracted.

  As described above, when there is a determination value of the random number value MR3 corresponding to the same variation category in each of the variation category determination tables corresponding to the number of pending storages, it corresponds to the same variation category. When the random number MR3 that matches the determination value is extracted at the time of winning, the number of pending storage is different between when the winning random number determination process (step S220) is executed and when the variation pattern setting process (step S111) is executed. Even if they are significantly different, the same variation category as in the random number determination process during winning is determined in the variation pattern setting process. For example, in the specific examples of the variation category determination tables “C-TBL1” to “C-TBL3” described above, if the random number value MR3 extracted at the time of winning is “99”, the winning number is retained regardless of the number of reserved memories. The fluctuation category “PA5” is determined by both the hourly random number determination processing and the fluctuation pattern setting processing. Further, if the random number value MR3 extracted at the time of winning is in the range of, for example, "97" to "98", the variation category "PA4" is used regardless of the number of reserved memories during the winning random number determination process or the variation pattern setting process. Is determined. In the process of step S111, it is preferable to determine the variation category by using the variation category determination random value MR3 stored as the pending data, but the CPU 103 newly determines the variation category determination random value MR3. The variation category may be determined by using the newly extracted random number value MR3 for determining the variation category.

  Subsequently, the CPU 103 uses the newly extracted random value MR3 for determining the variation category to determine the variation category, as in step S412. That is, as shown in FIG. 18, the variation category determination table to be used is selected from the plurality of variation category determination tables shown in FIG. 19 based on the special figure display result and the number of pending storages, and the selected variation category determination is performed. The variation category is determined based on the table and the random value MR3 for determining the variation category. Then, the CPU 103 selects one of the plurality of fluctuation pattern determination tables stored in the ROM 101, which is the fluctuation pattern determination table to be set as the usage table, based on the fluctuation category that is the determination result. Subsequently, the CPU 103 selects one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns based on the fluctuation pattern determination table set as the usage table and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR5 for the fluctuation pattern determination. To decide.

  FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating an example of setting the determination ratio of the variation pattern. It is assumed that the ROM 101 stores eight types of fluctuation pattern determination tables corresponding to the fluctuation categories. FIG. 21(A) is an example of setting the determination rate of the variation pattern by the variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA1 (shortening/non-reach loss)” among the above eight types. FIG. 21B is a setting example of the determination rate of the variation pattern by the variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA2 (non-reach (miss))” among the above eight types. FIG. 21C is a setting example of the determination rate of the variation pattern by the variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA3 (normal reach (miss))” among the above eight types. The same applies to FIGS. 21D to 21H below.

  As described above, in the main board 11, in the start winning determination process of step S101, the transmission setting for transmitting the start mouth winning designation command according to the start opening buffer value is performed to the effect control board 12 ( (Step S219), transmission settings for transmitting the symbol designating command according to the special figure display result determined in steps S403, S404, S409, etc. are performed (steps S405, S407, S410), and determined in step S412. The transmission setting for transmitting the variation category command according to the variation category is performed (step S413), and the transmission setting for transmitting the pending storage number notification command is performed (step S221).

  After these processes are executed, by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 13, the game ball passes (enters) the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening). When the first starting condition and the second starting condition are satisfied, the starting mouth winning designation command (the first starting mouth winning designation command or the second starting mouth winning designation command), the symbol designating command, the variable category command, and the number of retained memories Four commands, which are a command (first reserved storage number notification command or second reserved storage number notification command), are collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt as one set.

  Further, in the main board 11, in the special symbol normal process of step S110, a fixed special symbol that is a variable display result of the special symbol is obtained by using the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result or the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type. Is determined, and in the variation pattern setting process of step S111, the variation pattern of the decorative pattern is determined using the random value MR3 for determining the variation category, the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern, and the like.

Further, in the variation pattern setting process of step S111, a variable display result notification command for designating the fixed special symbol determined as described above, a variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern of the decorative pattern determined as described above, and the like, Transmission settings for transmission to the production control board 12 are performed. By executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 13 after these processes are executed, when the variable display is started, the variable display result notification command, the variation pattern designation command, etc. are included in one timer interrupt. Sent in batch.
Note that the commands are not limited to being collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt, and commands may be sequentially transmitted one by one by the command control processing of step S17 for each timer interrupt.

  That is, at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, the special symbol display process (variable display result of the special symbol) in the special symbol normal process (step S110) is a big hit as "big hit" or "small hit". It is determined whether to control the gaming state or the small hitting gaming state, and in the variation pattern setting process (step S111), a specific variable display mode (variation pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined, and the like. The content determined by the production control command of is transmitted to the production control board 12. Further, prior to this, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening), a "big hit" or a big hit is made by the random number determination process at the time of winning (step S220). It is judged whether or not it is controlled to a big hit game state or a small hit game state as a "small hit", a rough variable display mode (variation category) of a decorative pattern, etc., and determined by each effect control command. The performed content is transmitted to the effect control board 12.

  Further, when starting the variable display of the special symbol, the CPU 103, for example, in the processes of steps S233 and S237 in the special symbol normal process of step S110 and in the variation pattern setting process of step S111, the first reserved display 25A and the second A process of updating the first hold display and the second hold display on the hold display 25B is executed. For example, when starting the first special figure game, the CPU 103 controls the first reserved display 25A to display a display capable of specifying the subtracted number of the first special figure reserved memory by one. (For example, reduce the number of red-lighted LEDs by one). Further, when starting the second special figure game, the CPU 103 controls the second pending display 25B to display a display capable of specifying the number of the second special figure pending storage subtracted by one, the second pending display 25B. (For example, the number of LEDs that are lit in blue is reduced by 1).

  Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described.

  In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 22 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 12. Register settings of the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit) are performed. Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S72). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on the CTC register setting, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S72; No), the process of step S72 is repeatedly executed and stands by.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command or the like from the main board 11 occurs in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt processing, a control such as a performance control command is performed from a predetermined input port of the input ports included in the I/O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. Capture the signal.

  The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194, for example. As an example, when the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S72 (step S72; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S73), and the command analysis process is executed (step S74). In the command analysis processing executed in step S74, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and controls corresponding to the produced control commands are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S74, the effect control process process is executed (step S75). In the effect control process process of step S75, various operations such as an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speaker 8, a light emission operation in the first lamp 9, and a drive operation in the effect model are performed. With respect to the control content of the production operation using the production device, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the production control command transmitted from the main board 11.

  After the effect control process process of step S75, the effect random number updating process is executed (step S76), and the effect random numbers counted by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 are used as various random number values for effect control. The numerical data indicating is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S72.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S74 of FIG. 22 as command analysis processing. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 23, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms the stored contents of the effect control command reception buffer to confirm that the received command from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 is received. It is determined whether there is any (step S501). At this time, if there is no received command (step S501; No), the command analysis process ends.

  If there is a received command in step S501 (step S501; Yes), it is determined whether the received command is the first starting mouth winning designation command, for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command. (Step S502). Then, when the command is the first start mouth winning award designation command (step S502; Yes), the first waiting storage number notification waiting time is set (step S503). For example, in the process of step S503, a timer initial value predetermined corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first reserved storage number notification command is set in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192. Good.

  When the received command is not the first start mouth prize designation command in step S502 (step S502; No), it is determined whether the received command is the second start mouth prize designation command (step S504). Then, when the command is the second starting opening winning award designation command (step S504; Yes), the second waiting storage number notification waiting time is set (step S505). For example, in the process of step S505, the command reception control timer may be set to a timer initial value that is predetermined in correspondence with the reception waiting time of the second reserved storage number notification command.

  When the received command is not the second starting mouth winning designation command in step S504 (step S504; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a symbol designation command (step S506). When the received command is not the symbol designating command in step S506 (step S506; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is the variation category command (step S507). When the received command is not the variable category command in step S507 (step S507; No), it is determined whether the received command is the first reserved storage number notification command (step S508). Then, when the command is the first reserved storage number notification command (step S508; Yes), the first reserved storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer (step S509). .

  If the received command is not the first reserved storage number notification command in step S508 (step S508; No), it is determined whether the received command is the second reserved storage number notification command (step S510). When it is the second reserved storage number notification command (step S510; Yes), the second reserved storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timekeeping operation by the command reception control timer (step S511). .

  If the received command is a symbol designating command in step S506 (step S506; Yes), if the received command is a variable category command in step S507 (step S507; Yes), or steps S503, S505, S509, S511. After any one of the processing of step 1) is executed, if the first pending storage number notification waiting time is set in the processing of step S503 for the reception command received immediately before the reception command, the reception command is After being stored at the head of an empty area in the 1-start winning command buffer 194A (step S512), the process returns to step S501.

  If the received command is a symbol designating command in step S506 (step S506; Yes), the received command is a variable category command in step S507 (step S507; Yes), or steps S503, S505, S509. , S511, after the execution of any of the processing of S511, if the second pending storage number notification waiting time is set in the processing of step S503 for the reception command received immediately before the reception command, Is stored at the beginning of an empty area in the second start winning prize reception command buffer 194B (step S512), and the process returns to step S501.

  In addition, when the first reserved storage number notification command is received together with the first variation start command, the reserved storage number notification command may not be stored in the first start winning award reception command buffer 194A. That is, it is sufficient that the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the empty area in the first start winning-time reception command buffer 194A.

  In addition, when the second reserved storage number notification command is received together with the second variation start command, the reserved storage number notification command may not be stored in the second start prize-winning reception command buffer 194B. That is, it is sufficient that the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the empty area in the second starting winning time reception command buffer 194B.

  When the received command is not the second reserved storage number notification command in step S510 (step S510; No), settings are made according to other received commands (step S513), and the process returns to step S501. For example, when the received command is a game state designation command, the game state designation command is analyzed to specify the current game state. Further, for example, when the received command is a hit end designation command, the hit end designation command is analyzed to specify whether or not it is a time saving.

  Starting mouth winning designation command (first starting mouth winning designation command or second starting mouth winning designation command), symbol designating command, variation category command, pending storage number notification command (first pending storage number notification command, second pending storage number Like the notification command), the effect control command received from the main board 11 when the start winning is generated is also referred to as a start winning command. The first reserved storage number notification command, the second reserved storage number notification command, the first starting mouth winning designation command, and the second starting mouth winning designation command are also referred to as reserved storage information. The symbol designating command and the variation category command are also referred to as determination result information.

  When the received commands are sequentially stored from the beginning of the free area in the first start winning award reception command buffer 194A, whether the received command is a symbol designating command, a variation category command, or a first reserved storage number notification command The received commands may be stored without distinction, or each received command may be distinguished and stored at the beginning of the free area in the corresponding storage area.

  Further, when the received commands are sequentially stored from the beginning of the empty area in the second start winning prize reception command buffer 194B, it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designating command, a variation category command, or a second reserved storage number notification command. The received commands may be stored without distinction, or each received command may be distinguished and stored at the beginning of the free area in the corresponding storage area.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 22 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 24, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prize time effect determination process (step S150). FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step S150 of FIG. 24 as the winning effect determination process.

  In the winning effect determination process shown in FIG. 25, the effect control CPU 120 first stores the stored contents in the starting winning reception command buffer (first starting winning reception command buffer 194A or second starting winning reception command buffer 194B). It is checked (step S151), and it is determined whether or not the first start mouth winning designation command is received as a new received command (step S152). When it is determined in step S152 that the first start winning combination designation command has not been received (step S152; No), the contents stored in the second start winning combination reception command buffer 194B are checked (step S153), and a new It is determined whether or not the second start opening winning award designation command is received as the received command (step S153). When it is determined in step S154 that the second start mouth winning award designation command has not been received (step S154; No), the winning-time effect determination process ends.

When it is determined in step S152 that the first start opening winning award designation command is received (step S152; Yes), the red lighting addition process of the first hold indicator 51A is performed (step S152A). By executing the process of step S152A, the number of the LEDs 51Aa to 51Ad of the first hold indicator 51A that are turned on in red increases by one. After the process of step S152A, if it is specified in the process of step S513 in the command analysis process of FIG. 23 that the time is not shortened (step S155: NO), the first hold effect determination process is executed (step S160). ). The first hold effect determination process includes a process of determining a display mode (also referred to as a display mode during addition) of the hold display when the additional display is performed in the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL.
In addition, when executing the hold change effect or the hold change change effect for the hold display at the time of additionally displaying in the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL, whether the hold change effect or the hold change effect effect is executed in the step. A process of deciding whether or not to execute, a process of deciding the execution timing of the holding effect when it is decided to execute the holding effect, and the like may be performed.

First, the determination process for determining the display mode of the hold display when the additional display is performed in the first starting prize winning memory display area 5HL will be described.
FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display. It is assumed that the ROM 121 stores seven types of pending display mode determination tables according to the variation category. FIG. 26(A) shows the pending display mode selected when the variation category is “PA1 (shortening/non-reach loss)” or the variation category “PA2 (non-reach (loss))” among the seven types described above. It is a setting example (H-TBL1) of the determination rate of the display mode of the hold display by the determination table. FIG. 26B is a setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display according to the hold display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PA3 (normal reach (miss))” among the above seven types ( H-TBL 2). FIG. 26C shows the setting of the determination rate of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PA4 (super reach α (miss))” among the seven types described above. It is an example (H-TBL3).

  FIG. 26D is a setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display according to the hold display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PA5 (super reach β (miss)” among the seven types described above. 26(E) is a display of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PB3 (normal reach (big hit))” among the above-mentioned seven types. 26(F) is a setting example of the determination rate of the mode (H-TBL5), and is selected when the variation category is “PB4 (super reach α (big hit))” among the seven types described above. 26G is a setting example (H-TBL6) of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display based on the display mode determination table, and the variation category “PB5 (super reach β (big hit)) among the seven types described above. Is a setting example (H-TBL7) of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display according to the hold display mode determination table selected when "".

  According to FIG. 26, for example, in the case of reach, as compared with the case of non-reach, red and yellow are more easily determined, and blue and white (initial color) are less likely to be determined. Also, in the case of reach, red or yellow is easier to determine when it is hot reach (for example, super reach) than when it is not hot reach (for example, normal reach), and it is difficult to determine blue or white. ing. Alternatively, according to FIG. 18, FIG. 19 and FIG. 26, when the special figure display result is “big hit”, red or yellow is easier to be decided than when the special figure display result is “miss”, and blue or It is difficult to determine the white color. In other words, the display mode of red and yellow has a higher expectation that a hot effect will be executed and the expectation that it will be a big hit than the display modes of blue and white. More specifically, in the order of red, yellow, blue, and white, the degree of expectation that a hot effect will be executed and the degree of expectation that a big hit will increase.

  That is, in the first hold effect determination process (step S160), the effect control CPU 120, based on the change category designated by the change category command transmitted from the main board 11, the plurality of hold display modes shown in FIG. The hold display mode determination table to be used is selected from the determination tables, and is added to the first start winning a prize memory display area 5HL based on the selected hold display mode determination table and the random value MR6 for determining the display mode of the hold display. The display mode (display mode at the time of addition) of the hold display to be displayed is determined.

  After executing the first hold effect determination process (step S160), the effect control CPU 120 stores the determination content of the first hold effect determination process based on the determination result of the first hold effect determination process (step S161). .. Specifically, for example, the effect control CPU 120 sets the display mode of the hold display in the first hold effect determination process to the first start winning prize reception command buffer 194A corresponding to the first start winning prize buffer number. The determination content (display mode at the time of addition) of the first hold effect determination processing is stored in association with the buffer number of the prefetching announcement buffer 194C.

  Note that the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the hold change effect in the first hold effect determination process, and when it is determined to execute the hold change effect, the determination content of the hold effect determination process (hold change). Corresponding to the buffer number in the first start winning award reception command buffer 194A corresponding to the execution timing when executing the effect, the execution timing when executing the pending change gase effect, the execution timing when executing the pending change) Corresponding to the buffer number of 1 pre-reading notice buffer 194C, the determination content of the pending effect determination process (information indicating that the pending change effect is executed (for example, flag), information indicating that the pending change event effect is executed (for example, Flag), information indicating that the hold change is to be executed (for example, flag), and information specifying the hold display that is changed by the hold effect as the hold display of the target (that is, the hold display by the first start winning) (for example, , A buffer number of the first read-ahead notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number of the first start winning combination in the first start winning combination received command buffer 194A).

  In this case, for example, in the first hold effect determination process at the time of the first start winning prize for the third special figure hold memory number 3, the additional display mode "white", hold effect "execution (hold change effect execution)" If the execution timing is “next variation”, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the buffer number of the first start prize in the first start prize-winning reception command buffer 194A (for example, the buffer number “3”). The display mode “white” at the time of addition is stored in association with the buffer number (buffer number “3”) of the first prefetching advance notice buffer 194C corresponding to the execution timing “next variation”. 1 Start prize winning notification that the pending change effect is executed in association with the buffer number (buffer number “1”) of the first look-ahead notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number (buffer number “1”) in the command buffer 194A The indicated information and the buffer number “3” may be stored.

  In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the hold change effect in the first hold effect determination process, the buffer in the first start winning prize reception command buffer 194A corresponding to the execution timing of the first hold effect determination process. Only the information for specifying the target hold display (hold display due to the first start winning) may be stored in association with the buffer number of the first prefetching notice buffer 194C corresponding to the number (the hold change effect is executed). It is not necessary to store the information indicating that).

  After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 displays the hold display determined in the first hold effect determination process (step S160) (the first start prize in the first start winning combination reception command buffer 194A). Based on the display mode at the time of addition stored in association with the buffer number of the first read-ahead notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number of No. Suspension addition processing is executed (step S162). More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first start winning award storage display area 5HL to display a hold display in the additional display mode stored in association with the buffer number of the first prefetching notice buffer 194C described above. By setting the control pattern as the usage pattern and transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, the first hold effect The hold display according to the display mode at the time of addition determined in the determination processing is added to the first start prize winning memory display area 5HL. Then, the winning effect determination process is ended.

When it is determined in step S154 that the second start opening winning award designation command is received (step S154; Yes), blue lighting addition processing for the second hold indicator 51B is performed (step S154A). By executing the process of step S154A, the number of the LEDs 51Ba to 51Bd of the second hold indicator 51B that are turned on in blue increases by one. After the process of step S154A, if it is specified in the process of step S513 in the command analysis process of FIG. 23 that the time is shortened (step S156: YES), the second hold effect determination process is executed (step S163). ). The second hold effect determination process includes a process of determining a display mode (also referred to as an additional display mode) of the hold display when the additional display is performed in the second starting prize winning memory display area 5HR.
In addition, when executing the hold change effect or the hold change change effect for the hold display when additionally displaying in the second start winning prize memory display area 5HR, whether the hold change effect or the hold change effect effect is executed in the step. A process of deciding whether or not to execute, a process of deciding the execution timing of the holding effect when it is decided to execute the holding effect, and the like may be performed.

  In addition, the processing of each of step S163, step S164, and step S165 related to the second starting mouth winning is similar to the processing of each of step S160, step S161, and step S162 related to the first starting mouth winning, Since it is possible to read "first" in each step as "second" and read the code corresponding to the read, the description is omitted.

  When it is determined in step S152 that the first start mouth prize designation command is received (step S152; Yes), and when it is specified that the time is shortened in the process of step S513 in the command analysis process of FIG. 23 (step S152: Yes). (S155: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the display mode of the first hold display to be additionally displayed in the first start prize winning memory display area 5HL to be the initial color (white), and the first start prize receiving command buffer 194A. In association with the same buffer number as the buffer number corresponding to the stored content in, the first reserved display in the white display mode is added to the first start winning a prize memory display area 5HL (step S166). Then, the winning effect determination process is ended.

  In addition, when it is determined that the second start opening winning award designation command is received in step S154 (step S154; Yes), and it is specified in the process of step S513 in the command analysis process of FIG. 23 that it is not time-saving. (Step S156: YES), the CPU 120 for effect control determines the display mode of the second hold display to be additionally displayed in the second start prize winning memory display area 5HR to be the normal display (white ball), and at the time of the second start winning prize. The second hold display in the normal display (white ball) display mode is added to the second start winning award memory display area 5HR in association with the same buffer number as the buffer number corresponding to the stored content in the reception command buffer 194B. (Step S166). Then, the winning effect determination process is ended.

  After executing the winning effect determination process of step S150 shown in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25, the fourth symbol control process for controlling the display of the fourth symbol is executed (step S180). FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S180 of FIG. 24 as the fourth symbol control process.

  In the fourth symbol control process shown in FIG. 27, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command has been received (step S181). When it is determined in step S181 that the first variation start command has been received (step S181; Yes), red blink control processing for blinking the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in red is performed (step S182). ). In step S182, for example, the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is blinked in red at the display time corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, so that the fourth symbol is passed through the display drive unit 16. Processing for controlling the display 51D is performed.

  When it is determined in step S181 that the first variation start command has not been received (step S181; No), it is determined whether the second variation start command has been received (step S183). When it is determined in step S183 that the second variation start command is received (step S183; Yes), blue blinking control processing for blinking and displaying the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in blue is performed (step S184). ). In step S184, for example, the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is blinked in blue at the display time corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, so that the fourth symbol is passed through the display drive unit 16. Processing for controlling the display 51E is performed.

  When it is determined in step S183 that the second variation start command has not been received (step S183; No), and after executing any of the processes of steps S182 and S184, the jackpot start designation command is received. It is determined whether or not there is (step S185). When it is determined in step S185 that the big hit start designation command is received (step S185; Yes), whether the variable display game executed immediately before receiving the big hit start designation command is the first special figure game or not. It is determined (step S186). For example, as the big hit start designation command, a big hit start designation command indicating that the big hit game state is started after the first special figure game, and a big hit start indicating that the big hit game state is started after the second special figure game. It suffices if the specified command and are included. In this case, in step S186, when the big hit start designation command indicating that the big hit game state after the first special figure game is started is received, the variable display executed immediately before the big hit start designation command is received. It may be determined that the game is the first special figure game.

  When it is determined in step S186 that the variable display game executed immediately before receiving the big hit start designation command is the first special figure game (step S186; Yes), the fourth symbol for the first special figure is red. A red lighting control process for lighting and displaying is performed (step S187). In step S187, a process for controlling the fourth symbol display device 51D via the display drive unit 16 is performed so that the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is lit and displayed in red.

  If it is determined in step S186 that the variable display game executed immediately before the big hit start designation command is received is not the first special figure game (the second special figure game) (step S186; No), the A blue lighting control process for lighting and displaying the fourth symbol for the 2 special symbols in blue is performed (step S188). In step S188, a process for controlling the fourth symbol display device 51E via the display drive unit 16 is performed so that the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is lit and displayed in blue.

  If it is determined in step S185 that the big hit start designation command has not been received (step S185; No), and if the big hit end designation command has been received after performing any of the processes of steps S187 and S188. It is determined whether or not (step S189). When it is determined in step S189 that the big hit end designation command has been received (step S189; Yes), a turn-off control process for turning off the fourth symbol is performed (step S190). In step S190, for example, if the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is lit and displayed in red, that is, if the LED of the fourth symbol indicator 51D is lit in red, for the first special symbol A process for controlling the fourth symbol display device 51D is performed via the display drive unit 16 so as to turn off the fourth symbol. Moreover, when the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is lit and displayed in blue, that is, when the LED of the fourth symbol indicator 51E is lit in blue, the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is displayed. Processing for controlling the fourth symbol display device 51E is performed via the display drive unit 16 so as to turn off the light.

  In step S190, regardless of whether the fourth symbol for the first special figure is lit and displayed in red or the fourth symbol for the second special figure is lit and displayed in blue, It may be controlled to turn off both the fourth symbol and the fourth symbol for the second special symbol. In this case, with respect to the fourth symbol which is originally turned off, it is maintained as it is turned off.

  When it is determined in step S189 that the big hit end designation command has not been received (step S189; No), after executing the process of step S190, the fourth symbol control process is ended. When it is determined that the big hit end designation command has not been received (step S189; No), for example, the end code indicating the variable display end of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or the main board In response to receiving the symbol confirmation command transmitted from 11, etc., the extinguishing control of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol or the decorative symbol for the second special symbol is performed.

  After executing the fourth symbol control process of step S180 shown in FIGS. 24 and 27, for example, the following step S170 to, depending on the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 or the like. One of the processes of 177 is selected and executed.

  The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" which is the initial value. This variable display start waiting process is performed based on whether the first variation start command (or second variation start command), variation pattern designation command, variable display result notification command, etc. transmitted from the main board 11 are received. It includes a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of a decorative pattern on the display device 5. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1".

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". This variable display start setting process corresponds to the variable display of the special symbol being started in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the decorative symbol in the image display device 5. Process to determine the fixed decorative symbol according to the variation pattern of the special symbol and the type of the display result to perform variable display and other various staging operations, and the first hold display or the second hold display is shifted to be active. Processing for displaying a special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the first hold display or the second hold display in the display area AHA, various effects and effect modes of various effects (for example, active display which is a main notice effect) It includes a change effect, a process for determining an effect mode of the active display change effect, and the like. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2".

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In the effect display during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 based on the effect control pattern determined in the variable display start setting processing. Then, various control data are read out, and various effect control (for example, variable display control of decorative design during variable display of decorative design) is performed. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a video signal (effect image) to the image display device 5 for display on the screen based on the read control data, and outputs an effect sound signal to the voice control board 13. Then, various effect controls such as control for outputting effect sound from the speaker 8 and control for outputting an illumination signal to the lamp control board 14 to turn on/off/blink the first lamp 9 are executed.

  After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. Then, the fixed decorative design as the final stopped design resulting in the variable display of the decorative design is completely stopped and displayed. If the fixed decorative pattern is completely stopped and displayed in response to the end code being read from the effect control pattern, when the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command has elapsed Even if the production control command from the main board 11 is not used, the final display pattern can be autonomously derived and displayed on the side of the production control board 12 to confirm the variable display result. When the fixed decorative design is completely stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3".

  The special figure winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. Then, when the hit start designation command is received and the hit start designation command designates the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is "6" which is a value corresponding to the big hit medium effect processing. To update. On the other hand, when the hit start designation command is received, if the hit start designation command designates the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is a value corresponding to the effect processing in the small hit. Is updated to "4". When the effect control process timer times out without receiving the hit start designation command, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is "miss", and the value of the effect process flag is the initial value. Update to "0".

  The effect process during small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "4". In the effect processing during the small hit, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, reads various control data based on the setting contents, and in step S172. Similar to the variable display during effect processing, various effect controls in the small hitting gaming state are executed by outputting a video signal, effect sound signal, electric decoration signal, or the like. Further, in the small hitting mid-stage effect process, for example, in response to receiving a hit end designation command from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "5" which is a value corresponding to the small hitting end effect. .

  The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hitting end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and reads out various control data based on the setting contents, and in step S172. Similar to the variable display during production process, various production controls at the end of the small hitting game state are executed by outputting a video signal, a production sound signal, an illumination signal, or the like. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0".

  The big hit midfield effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In the big hit mid-hit effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit game state, reads various control data based on the setting contents, and performs variable display in step S172. Similar to the medium effect process, by outputting a video signal, effect sound signal, electric decoration signal, etc., various effect controls in the big hit game state are executed. Further, in the big hit midfield effect process, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "7" which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving the hit end designation command from the main board 11, for example.

  The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit game state, reads out various control data based on the setting contents, and during variable display in step S172. Similar to the effect process, by outputting a video signal, effect sound signal, electric decoration signal, etc., various effect controls at the end of the big hit game state are executed. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0".

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of FIG. 24 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 28, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11, and the special figure display result is “missed”. It is determined whether or not (step S522). When it is determined that the special figure display result is “miss” (step S522; Yes), the specified fluctuation pattern is read by, for example, reading the EXT data in the fluctuation pattern specification command transmitted from the main board 11. In the non-reach variation pattern (that is, "PA1-1" "PA2-1" "PA2-2" "PA2-3" in FIG. 7) corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" It is determined whether there is any (step S523).

  When it is determined in step S523 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S523; Yes), a combination of fixed decorative symbols which is the final stop symbol forming the non-reach combination is determined (step S524). As an example, in the process of step S524, first, the numerical data indicating the random number value for the left definite symbol determination updated by the random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in the ROM 121 or the like in advance. By referring to the predetermined left fixed design determination table, the left fixed decorative design to be stopped and displayed in the "left" decorative design display area 5L in the display area of the image display device 5 of the fixed decorative design is determined.

  Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the right fixed symbol updated by the random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and the predetermined right fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to, etc., the right fixed decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative pattern display area 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 among the fixed decorative patterns is determined. At this time, it may be determined such that the design number of the right fixed decorative design is different from the design number of the left fixed decorative design by the setting in the right fixed design determination table. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value for medium-decision symbol determination updated by the random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and the predetermined medium-determination symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to, etc., the middle fixed decorative design to be stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative design display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 of the fixed decorative designs is determined. In the process of step S524, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination that is the predetermined chance eye symbol may be determined corresponding to the case where the variable symbol notice is being executed.

  When it is determined in step S523 that the pattern is not the non-reach variation pattern (step S523; No), the combination of the fixed decorative symbols which is the final stop symbol forming the reach combination is determined (step S525). As an example, in the process of step S525, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left and right fixed symbols, which is updated by a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193, is extracted and stored in the ROM 121 or the like in advance. By referring to the predetermined left and right finalized symbol determination table, the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 among the finalized decorative symbols are stopped and displayed together. The decorative pattern with the same design number is determined. Furthermore, the numerical data indicating the random number value for medium fixed symbol determination updated by the random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and the predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is displayed. By referring to the determined decorative design, the medium fixed decorative design to be stopped and displayed in the "medium" decorative design display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined.

  Here, in the case where the fixed decorative design is a big hit combination, as in the case where the design number of the medium fixed decorative design is the same as the design number of the left fixed decorative design and the right fixed decorative design, an arbitrary value is set. (For example, "1") may be added to or subtracted from the symbol number of the medium fixed decorative design so that the fixed decorative design does not become a big hit combination but becomes a reach combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium fixed decorative design, the difference (design difference) between the left fixed decorative design and the right fixed decorative design is determined, and the medium fixed decorative design corresponding to the determined difference may be set. .

  When it is determined in step S522 that the special figure display result is not "miss" (step S522; No), if the special figure display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probable", or the special figure display It is determined whether the result is "small hit" or other cases (step S526). When it is determined to be a "probability" or a "small hit" (step S526; Yes), for example, a final decoration to be the final stop symbol corresponding to the "probable" or "small hit" such as the opening opportunity. The combination of symbols is determined (step S527). In this case, numerical data indicating a random number value for chance chance determination, which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193, is extracted, and a predetermined chance chance determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. It is only necessary to determine the combination of the fixed decorative patterns forming any one of the opening chances by referring to.

  When it is determined in step S526 that it is a "non-probable change" or a "probable change" other than "probability" or "small hit" (step S526; No), the final decorative design which is the final stop design forming the big hit combination is set. The combination is determined (step S528). As an example, in the process of step S528, first, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the jackpot confirmed symbol which is updated by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and subsequently stored in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined jackpot determination symbol determination table or the like, the display is stopped and displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R on the screen of the image display device 5. The decorative design with the same design number is determined. At this time, depending on whether the big hit type is "non-probable change" or "probable change", whether or not promotion effect during the big hit, and the like, a different decorative pattern may be determined as a fixed decorative pattern. Good.

  As a specific example, when the jackpot type is "non-probable variation", one of the decorative patterns of a plurality of types of normal symbols is selected, and it is determined as a definite decorative symbol that constitutes the non-probable variation jackpot combination. Good. Further, when the jackpot type is "probable variation", any one decorative symbol is selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols or probabilistic symbols, and a definite decorative jackpot combination or a confirmed variable jackpot combination is formed. You can decide to. At this time, when it is determined to be a fixed decorative pattern of the non-probability variation big hit combination, the notification that the probability variation state is controlled in the re-lottery effect in the variable display is not given, and it is executed corresponding to the big jackpot game state. It is only necessary to be informed that it is controlled to a probable state by means of promotion performance during a big hit. On the other hand, when the confirmed decorative pattern of the probability variation big hit combination is decided, in the re-lottery effect during variable display or without executing the re-lottery effect, a notification that the probability variation state is controlled is given.

  After executing any one of the processes of steps S524, S525, S527, and S528, the pending digestion process is executed (step S531). Specifically, the active display corresponding to the fluctuation is displayed in the active display area AHA (in other words, the special image including the active display corresponding to the fluctuation is displayed). For example, when the variation of the decorative design is started in association with the first special drawing game (when the variable display of the decorative design this time is linked to the first special drawing game), the first start winning prize memory display area The active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the 5HL is displayed in the active display area AHA (the special image including the active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL). Is displayed). More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 moves the active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the first start prize winning memory display area 5HL to the active display area AHA to display the active display. Is set as a usage pattern, and the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. The active display area AHA displays an active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the area 5HL. The active display in the active display area AHA may be displayed in the same mode as the hold display, or may be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the hold display but different from the hold display. The same applies when the variation of the decorative design is started in conjunction with the second special figure game.

  Further, in the process of step S531, the effect control CPU 120, when there is a hold display in addition to the hold display (active display) to be exhausted in the first starting prize winning memory display area 5HL, first displays the other hold display. When the start winning award memory display area 5HL shifts, and when the second starting award memory display area 5HR has a hold display in addition to the active display, the other hold display is shifted in the second start award memory display area 5HR.

  After executing the process of step S531, the effect execution setting process is executed (step S532). The effect execution setting process includes a process of deciding whether or not to execute the active display change effect for the active display corresponding to the variation, a process of deciding the type of the active display change effect at the time of execution, and an active process at the time of execution. Includes a process of determining the effect mode of the display change effect, a process of determining the execution timing of the active display change effect when executing, a process of setting (or resetting) the effect control pattern based on these determination results Has been. Details will be described later.

  After executing the processing of step S532, execution setting of other variable display is performed (step S533). As an example, in the process of step S533, the execution setting of “one-shot notification effect” is performed to immediately notify (deterministically notify) that the variable display result is “big hit” by the big hit notification sound or the big hit notification light emission. You may. An example of the big hit notification sound is an alarm sound, a chime sound, a siren sound, or the like. An example of the big hit notification light emission is light emission of a specific first lamp 9. Further, in the process of step S533, regardless of whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit", for example, it may be set such that the effect in a predetermined mode is executed for bustling. For example, the effect may be set such that a predetermined first lamp 9 emits light.

  After executing the process of step S533, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 is set corresponding to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command (step S534). . Subsequently, a variable display start setting process for setting a change of the decorative pattern or the like in the image display device 5 is executed (step S535).

  For example, the image display is performed by transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data, which is included in the effect control pattern set as the use pattern in the effect execution setting process of step S532, to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. The sound in the speaker 8 is set by transmitting the effect sound signal specified by the sound control data included in the effect control pattern to the sound control board 13 or the like on the screen of the device 5 to start changing the decorative pattern. In order to start the light emission from the first lamp 9 by transmitting the setting for starting the output or transmitting the electric decoration signal designated by the lamp control data included in the effect control pattern to the first lamp control board 14. Set. Also, settings for starting various displays on the information display unit 51 by transmitting the display content designated by the display control data included in the effect control pattern to the display drive unit 16, and included in the effect control pattern. The setting for starting the light emission in the second lamp 52 by transmitting the light emission operation designated by the lamp control data to the second lamp drive unit 17, or the drive operation designated by the drive control data included in the effect control pattern. Is transmitted to the accessory drive unit 18, and the light emission operation designated by the lamp control data included in the effect control pattern is set via the accessory drive unit 18. The setting for starting the emission of light from the LED group 545 is performed by transmitting the third lamp driving unit 541 of the versatilizer 54 or the like.

  After the processing of step S535 is executed, the command stored in the first start-winning-prize received command buffer 194A or the second start-winning-prize received command buffer 194B is consumed (step S536). Specifically, when the variable display of the decorative design is started in association with the first special figure game, the effect control CPU 120 selects the most command from among the commands associated with the first start prize-winning reception command buffer 194A. The command (1 set) stored in the area corresponding to the small buffer number is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (the first start mouth winning designation) The command associated with the command is shifted while maintaining the winning order.When the variable display of the decorative design is started in synchronization with the second special figure game, it is stored in the second start winning time reception command buffer. Command (1 set) stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the existing commands, and delete the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command. , Shift while maintaining the winning order.

  In the process of step S536, the red lighting reduction process of the first reserved display 51A is performed when the variation of the decorative design is started in conjunction with the first special figure game. By executing the red-lighting reduction processing of the first hold indicator 51A, one of the LEDs 51Aa to 51Ad of the first hold indicator 51A that is lit in red is reduced. In addition, when the variation of the decorative design is started in conjunction with the second special figure game, the blue lighting reduction process of the second hold indicator 51B is performed. By executing the blue lighting reduction processing of the second hold indicator 51B, one of the LEDs 51Ba to 51Bd of the second hold indicator 51B, which is lit in blue, is reduced. The red light reduction processing of the first hold display 51A and the blue light reduction processing of the second hold display 51B may be executed in the hold exhaustion processing of step S531, for example.

  Further, in the process of step S536, the information stored in the first prefetching notice buffer 194C or the second prefetching notice buffer 194D provided in the RAM 122 or the like is also deleted or shifted according to the deletion or shift of the command. . After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2" which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S537), and the variable display start setting processing is ended.

  Here, the effect execution setting process (step S532) will be described in detail. First, a process of deciding whether to execute the active display change effect for the active display corresponding to the variation, and a process of deciding the type of the active display change effect when it is decided to execute the active display change effect (which active A process of determining whether to execute the display change effect) will be described.

  FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of setting the determination rate based on the active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table. The example of the setting indicates whether or not to execute the active display change effect, and the determination ratio of the effect mode of the active display change effect when executing the type of the active display change effect (which active display change effect is to be executed). This is a setting example. In the active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table, the numerical values (decision values) to be compared with the random number value MR7 (not shown) for determining the presence/absence of execution of the active display change effect are “execution performed” and “execution not performed”. 29 are assigned to each of them at a determined rate as shown in FIG. In addition, in the “execution” of the active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table, the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR7 (not shown) for determination is “first system change effect” and “ Each of the "second system change effect" and the "first system change effect and the second system change effect" is assigned at a determination rate as shown in FIG. In addition, the first system change effect includes a plurality of types of effect modes having similar effect modes. The second system change effect includes a plurality of types of effect modes having similar effect modes. Specifically, the first system change effect is an effect that affects the display mode of the active display, and the second system change effect is an effect that affects the display mode of the active display frame. The target that acts on the second system change effect is different.

  It should be noted that “execution available” and “first system change effect” indicate that the first system change effect is performed as an active display change effect, and “execution enabled” and “second system change effect” indicate the second system change effect. This means that it is performed as an active display change effect, and “execution present”, “first system change effect and second system change effect” means that both the change effects of the first system change effect and the second system change effect are changed by active display change. Indicates that the performance will be performed. Further, "no execution" represents that the active display change effect is not performed. Further, the fluctuation pattern PA1-X represents the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 shown in FIG. 7, and the fluctuation pattern PA2-X is any of the fluctuation patterns PA2-1, PA2-2, PA2-3 (PA2 shown in FIG. -1 to PA2-3), the variation pattern PA3-X represents one of the variation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 (PA3-1 to PA3-2) shown in FIG. 7, and the variation pattern PA4-X. Represents any one of the fluctuation patterns PA4-1, PA4-2, PA4-3, and PA4-4 (PA4-1 to PA4-4) shown in FIG. The same applies to the fluctuation patterns PA5-X, PB3-X, PB4-X, PB5-X.

  According to FIG. 29, when the variation pattern (variable display pattern) of the variation (variable display) designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation patterns PA1-X and PA2-X, "no execution" is 100. %, which means that neither the first system change effect nor the second system change effect is executed. That is, when the variation is non-reach (miss), the active display change effect is not executed.

  When the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation patterns PB3-X, PB4-X, PB5-X, the fluctuation patterns PA3-X, PA4-X, PA5-X are used. Compared to some cases, the rate of determining “no execution” is lower. In other words, the rate at which the active display change effect is executed when the "big hit" in the change is higher than the rate at which the active display change effect is executed when the "lost" in the change is performed. That is, when the active display change effect is executed, the degree of expectation of a “big hit” is higher than when the active display change effect is not executed.

  When the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation specified by the fluctuation pattern designating command is the fluctuation patterns PB3-X, PB4-X, PB5-X, it is the fluctuation patterns PA3-X, PA4-X, PA5-X. Compared to the case, the proportion of the “first system change effect and the second system change effect” that is determined when “executed” is determined is higher. For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern PB3-X, the proportion of the "first system change effect and the second system change effect" that is determined when "executed" is determined is about 57% (40÷70). On the other hand, in the case of the variation pattern PA3-X, the proportion of the “first system change effect and the second system change effect” that is determined when “executed” is determined is about 33% (10÷30). Is. Alternatively, in more detail, which of the fluctuation patterns PA3-X to PA5-X the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is, or which of the fluctuation patterns PB3-X to PB5-X. The difference (or ratio) between the rates for determining the “first system change effect and the second system change effect” is determined by the change pattern PA3-X to PA5-of the change pattern of the change specified by the change pattern specifying command. The difference between the proportions in which the “first system change effect” or the “second system change effect” is determined depending on which of the X and the variation patterns PB3-X to PB5-X is determined. For example, when the change pattern is PB3-X, the ratio of "first system change effect and second system change effect" is determined, and when it is the change pattern PA3-X, "first system change effect and second system change effect". The difference from the proportion in which the "production" is determined is 30% (40%-10%), while the proportion and the variation pattern in which the "first system change presentation" is determined when the variation pattern is PB3-X. The difference from the rate at which the "first system change effect" is determined when it is PA3-X is 5% (15%-10%). That is, when the first system change effect and the second system change effect are executed, the degree of expectation of a "big hit" is higher than when not.

  If the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation patterns PA4-X, PA5-X, PB4-X, PB5-X, it is the fluctuation patterns PA3-X, PB3-X. Compared with the case, the rate of determining “no execution” is lower. In other words, the rate at which the active display change effect is executed when the change reaches the super reach is higher than the rate at which the active display change effect is executed when the change reaches the normal reach. That is, when the active display change effect is executed, the degree of expectation of super-reach is higher than when the active display change effect is not executed.

  Similarly, when the first system change effect and the second system change effect are executed, the degree of expectation of super-reach is higher than when not.

  That is, in the effect execution setting process (step S532), the effect control CPU 120 specifies the active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table, the random value MR7 for determining whether the active display change effect execution is performed, and the variation pattern designation command. Whether or not to execute the active display change effect depending on the change pattern (variable display pattern) of the change (the variable display), and when the active display change effect is executed, the effect mode of the plurality of active display change effects is set. Of these, which active display change effect is to be executed is determined.

  Note that the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the active display change effect, and when it is determined to be “executed”, “first system change effect”, “second system change effect”, or “first system change effect”. And the second system change effect" may be determined.

  Next, in the case of active display (fluctuation) for executing the active display change effect, processing for determining the effect mode of the active display change effect to be executed will be described.

  FIG. 30(A) is a diagram showing a setting example of the determination rate of the effect mode of the first system change effect when the first system change effect is executed as the active display change effect. FIG. 30B is a diagram showing a setting example of the determination ratio of the effect mode of the second system change effect when the second system change effect is executed as the active display change effect. Further, FIG. 30C shows the determination ratio of the effect mode of the first system change effect and the second system change effect when both the first system change effect and the second system change effect are executed as the active display change effect. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting.

  It is assumed that the ROM 121 stores the active display change effect patterns as the effect modes of the four types of first system change effects corresponding to the 24 kinds of variation patterns shown in FIG. 7. Further, it is assumed that the ROM 21 stores active display change effect patterns as effect modes of three types of second system change effects corresponding to the 24 types of variation patterns shown in FIG. 7. Further, the ROM 21 stores 12 kinds of active display change effect patterns as effect modes of the first system change effect and the second system change effect corresponding to the 24 kinds of variation patterns shown in FIG. 7. To do.

The first system change effect is an effect effect that stimulates a change in the display mode of the active display, for example, an effect effect that incites a change in the display shape of the active display.
In FIG. 30A, in the active display change effect pattern “BP1”, if the display shape of the active display corresponding to the variation is “sphere” by default, the display shape of the active display is “sphere”. It is a production pattern of a failure production that does not change as it is (active display change gaze production). According to the illustrated example, when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach), the determination rate is higher than when the reach is hot (for example, super reach). Further, when the variation pattern is “miss” (for example, the variation pattern PA3-1), the determination rate is higher than that of the variation pattern (for example, the variation pattern PB3-1) that is “big hit”.

  The active display change effect pattern "BP2" is an effect effect that changes the display shape of the active display corresponding to the variation from the default display shape of "sphere" to the display shape of the active display of "triangle". It is a pattern. According to the illustrated example, when the variation pattern is “miss” (for example, the variation pattern PA4-1), the determination rate is higher than that of the variation pattern (for example, the variation pattern PB4-1) that is “big hit”. It's getting higher. Further, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the determination rate is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach).

  In addition, the active display change effect pattern “BP3” is an effect effect that changes the display shape of the active display corresponding to the change from the default display shape of “sphere” to the display shape of the active display of “pentagon”. It is a pattern. According to the illustrated example, when the variation pattern is the “big hit” (for example, the variation pattern PB3-1), the determination rate is higher than that of the variation pattern that is the “miss” (for example, the variation pattern PA3-1). It's getting higher. Further, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the determination rate is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach).

  In addition, the active display change effect pattern “BP4” is an effect effect that changes the display shape of the active display corresponding to the change from the default display shape of “sphere” to the active display shape of “star”. It is a pattern. According to the illustrated example, the determination rate is higher when the reach is hot (for example, super reach) than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach). Further, when the variation pattern is “big hit” (for example, variation pattern PB5-1), the determination rate is higher than that of the variation pattern (for example, variation pattern PA5-1) that is “miss”.

  The second system change effect is an effect effect that fuels a change in the display mode of the active display frame for the active display frame, for example, an effect effect that incites a change in the line thickness of the active display frame.

  In FIG. 30B, when the active display change effect pattern “CP1” has the line thickness of the active display frame surrounding the active display corresponding to the variation is “normal” as a default, the active display frame is displayed. It is a production pattern of a failure production (active display change gall production) in which the thickness of the line of “normal” is not changed. According to the illustrated example, when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach), the determination rate is higher than when the reach is hot (for example, super reach). Further, when the variation pattern is “miss” (for example, the variation pattern PA3-1), the determination rate is higher than that of the variation pattern (for example, the variation pattern PB3-1) that is “big hit”.

  The active display change effect pattern "CP2" is a success effect effect pattern in which the thickness of the line of the active display frame surrounding the active display is changed from "normal" to "middle thick". According to the illustrated example, when the variation pattern is “miss” (for example, the variation pattern PA4-1), the determination rate is higher than that of the variation pattern (for example, the variation pattern PB4-1) that is “big hit”. It's getting higher. Further, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the determination rate is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach).

  The active display change effect pattern “CP3” is a success effect effect pattern in which the thickness of the line of the active display frame surrounding the active display corresponding to the change is changed from “normal” to “extreme”. According to the illustrated example, when the variation pattern is “big hit” (for example, the variation pattern PB3-1), the determination ratio is higher than that of the variation pattern (for example, the variation pattern PA3-1) that is “miss”. It's getting higher. Further, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the determination rate is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach).

  The first system change effect and the second system change effect are an action effect that fuels a change in the display mode of the active display by the above-described first system change effect, and an active display that surrounds the active display by the above-described second system change effect. It is an action effect that performs both an action effect that fuels a change in the display mode of the frame.

  In FIG. 30C, the active display change effect pattern “AP1” has, by default, the display shape of the active display corresponding to the variation is “sphere” and the thickness of the line of the active display frame surrounding the active display. Is "normal", the display shape of the active display remains "sphere" and the line thickness of the active display frame remains "normal". It is a pattern. According to the illustrated example, when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach), the determination rate is higher than when the reach is hot (for example, super reach). Further, when the variation pattern is “miss” (for example, the variation pattern PA3-1), the determination rate is higher than that of the variation pattern (for example, the variation pattern PB3-1) that is “big hit”.

  Also, the active display change effect pattern “AP2” is a success in changing the display shape of the active display to “sphere” and changing the thickness of the line of the active display frame surrounding the active display from “normal” to “middle thick”. It is a production pattern of production. According to the illustrated example, when the variation pattern is “miss” (for example, the variation pattern PA4-1), the determination rate is higher than that of the variation pattern (for example, the variation pattern PB4-1) that is “big hit”. It's getting higher. Further, when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach), the determination rate is higher than when it is the heat reach (for example, super reach).

  In addition, the active display change effect pattern “AP3” is a successful effect in which the display shape of the active display remains “sphere” and the thickness of the line of the active display frame surrounding the active display is changed from “normal” to “extremely thick”. Is a production pattern of. When the variation pattern is “big hit” (for example, variation pattern PB3-1), the determination rate is higher than that for the variation pattern (for example, variation pattern PA3-1) that is “miss”. Further, when the reach is hot (for example, super reach), the determination rate is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach).

  The active display change effect pattern “AP4” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “triangle” and the line thickness of the active display frame is not changed as “normal”. The effect pattern “AP5” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “triangle” and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to “middle thick”. “AP6” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “triangle” and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to “extremely thick”.

  The active display change effect pattern “AP7” is an effect pattern in which the active display display shape is changed to “pentagon” and the line thickness of the active display frame is not changed to “normal”. The display change effect pattern “AP8” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “pentagon” and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to “middle thick”. The pattern “AP9” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “pentagon” and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to “extremely thick”.

  The active display change effect pattern “AP10” is an effect pattern in which the active display display shape is changed to “star” and the line thickness of the active display frame is not changed to “normal”. The display change effect pattern “AP11” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “star” and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to “middle thick”. The pattern “AP12” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the active display is changed to “star” and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to “extremely thick”.

  That is, in the effect execution setting process (step S532), the effect control CPU 120 determines the random number value MR8 for determining the active display change effect pattern and the variation pattern of the variation (the variable display) designated by the variation pattern designation command ( The variable display pattern) determines the active display change effect pattern as the effect mode of the active display change effect when executing the active display change effect.

  Next, a process of determining the timing of executing the active display change effect in the change will be described.

  FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of setting the determination rate by the effect execution timing determination table when executing the first system change effect. Note that the ROM 121 stores a plurality of (for example, four) execution timings of the first system change effect according to the 24 types of variation patterns shown in FIG. 7 as the effect execution timings of the first system change effect. And The timing 1 is, for example, the timing at which the first system change effect is executed at the start of the change, the timing 2 is the timing at which the first system change effect is executed at the pseudo continuous change, and the timing 3 is. The timing 4 is a timing at which the first system change effect is executed when the reach is established in the variation, and the timing 4 is a timing at which the first system change effect is executed after the reach is established (during the reach) in the variation. The pseudo continuous change is, for example, when the variable display being changed is temporarily stopped.

  Further, the variation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 classified into “successfulness expectation level “small”” indicate that the expectation level at which the successful performance is executed is “small”, and “successfulness expectation level “medium”. The variation patterns PA4-1 to PA4-4 and PA5-1 to PA5-4 classified into “are “medium” in which the degree of expectation that the success effect is executed is higher than the above-described success expectation degree “small”. Represents In addition, the variation patterns PB3-1 and PB3-2 classified into “successful expectation level “large”” are “large” in which the expectation level at which the successful performance is executed is higher than the success expectation level “medium”. In the variation patterns PB4-1 to PB4-4 and PB5-1 to PB5-4, which are classified as “successful expectation “maximum””, the expectation that the successful performance is executed is the above-mentioned success expectation “large”. It is higher than "maximum".

  Specifically, in FIG. 30, the change patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 are active display change effect patterns BP1 that are failure effects of the first system change effect, and active displays that are failure effects of the second system change effect. Compared with the ratio determined by the change effect pattern CP1 and the active display change effect pattern AP1 which is the failure effect of the first system change effect and the second system change effect, the ratios determined by the other active display change effect patterns. The degree of success is high, and the degree of success expectation at which the success effect can be executed is low, and the degree of success expectation is classified as “small” as described above.

  Further, in FIG. 30, variation patterns PA4-1 to PA4-4, PA5-1 to PA5-4, PB3-1 to PB3-2, PB4-1 to PB4-4 other than the variation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2. , PB5-1 to PA5-4, active display change effect patterns BP2 to BP4 that are successful effects of the first system change effect, active display change effect patterns CP2 to CP3 that are successful effects of the second system change effect, The proportions determined by the active display change presentation patterns AP2 to AP12, which are successful presentations of the first system change presentation and the second system change presentation, are higher than the proportions determined by the other active display change presentation patterns. The degree of success expectation that the success effect can be executed is higher than that of the variation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2. That is, the degree of expectation that the success effect can be executed is high due to the variation pattern as shown in FIG.

  In the example shown in FIG. 31, the variation pattern (variable display pattern) of the variation (variable display) designated by the variation pattern designation command is not the pseudo continuous variation, PA3-1, PA4-1, PA4-2. , PA5-1, PA5-2, PB3-1, PB4-1, PB4-2, PB5-1, PB5-2 indicate that the first system change effect is not executed at the timing 2.

  According to FIG. 31, when the hot reach (for example, super reach) is performed, the decision rate determined at an earlier timing (for example, timing 1) is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach). ing. Further, in the case of the variation pattern of “big hit”, the determination rate determined at the later timing (eg, timing 4) of the first system change effect is higher than that of the variation pattern of “miss”. . Further, after the reach is established (for example, timing 3 and timing 4), the degree of expectation of successful production is higher than that before the reach is established (for example, timing 1 and timing 2). In addition, after the temporary stop of the variable display in the pseudo continuous fluctuation (for example, timing 3 and timing 4), the expectation of successful production is higher than that before the temporary stop of the variable display in the pseudo continuous fluctuation (for example, timing 1). There is. With such a setting, the ratio of execution of the success effect is different depending on which of the timings 1 to 4 during execution of the variable display is executed as the common effect of the active display change effect.

  That is, in the effect execution setting process (step S532), the effect control CPU 120 changes the random value MR9 for determining the execution timing of the active display change effect and the change of the change (the variable display) specified by the change pattern specifying command. The pattern (variable display pattern) determines the execution timing of the active display change effect when the active display change effect is executed.

  At timing 2, immediately after the start of the re-variable display, for example, at the start of the first re-variable display or the second re-variable display, depending on the number of temporary stops of the variable display in the pseudo continuous variation. May be determined as the execution timing of the first system change effect, or the execution timing of the first system change effect may be determined at a plurality of execution timings in a plurality of pseudo continuous fluctuations. Further, the timing 2 at the time of pseudo continuous fluctuation may be after the reach is established. For example, the execution timing is set so that the timing 2 at the time of pseudo continuous variation is set after the timing 3 at the time of reach establishment in FIG. Alternatively, a plurality of timings including four timings may be set as the execution timing of the first system change effect.

  In addition, a setting example of the determination ratio of the effect mode of the first system change effect when executing the first system change effect as the active display change effect shown in FIG. 30 and the execution timing of the first system change effect shown in FIG. 31. The ROM 121 may be stored as one table by associating with and. The execution timing of the second system change effect and the execution timing of executing both the first system change effect and the second system change effect are the same.

  The setting example (not shown) of the determination rate by the execution timing determination table of the second system change effect is the same as the setting example of the determination rate by the effect execution timing determination table at the time of executing the first system change effect as shown in FIG. It may be the same, or it may be an example of setting the determination rate by the execution timing determination table of the second system change effect, which is different from the example of setting the determination rate by the effect execution timing determination table when the first system change effect is executed. Good.

  When it is determined in FIG. 29 that the “first system change effect and the second system change effect” are to be executed, the execution timings of the first system change effect and the second system change effect are as shown in FIG. 31. Using the setting example of the determination rate by the execution timing determination table, the first system change effect and the second system change effect may be collectively determined to be executed at the same timing, or the first system change effect and the first system change effect may be executed. It may be collectively determined so that the respective execution timings of the two-system change effect may be different execution timings. Further, when it is determined in FIG. 29 that the “first system change effect and the second system change effect” are to be executed, the respective execution timings of the first system change effect and the second system change effect are as shown in FIG. 31. The execution timings of the first system change effect and the second system change effect may be determined separately by using an example of setting the determination rate by the effect execution timing determination table.

  Next, a process of setting (or resetting) the effect control pattern based on the selection result of the active display change effect will be described.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the active display change effect determined based on the change pattern specified by the change pattern specification command transmitted from the main board 11, and when executing the active display change effect, the active display change effect. The production pattern of the production and the execution timing of the active display change production are set as the production control pattern. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command as an effect control pattern, and effects corresponding to the effect mode of the selected active display change effect. Set the pattern as a production control pattern. When a plurality of effect control patterns corresponding to the change pattern designated by the change pattern designation command are prepared, any one of them is selected and set as the effect control pattern. Then, the effect execution setting process (step S532) ends.

  Next, a specific example of control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

  On the main board 11 side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the first starting condition is satisfied, the CPU 103 updates the first reserved memory number, and when the second starting condition is satisfied, the CPU 103 determines the second reserved memory number. Is updated (step S215). The CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category (step S217). The CPU 103 determines the special figure display result by using the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the like (steps S403 and S404). The CPU 103 determines the variation category based on the special figure display result which is the determination result, the number of reserved memories updated in step S215, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category extracted in step S217 (step S412). . The CPU 103 that has determined the variation category sets transmission of a variation category command that specifies the variation category that is the determination result (step S413), and executes command control processing (step S17). As a result, the variation category command designating the variation category determined in step S412 is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. On the main board 11 side, the CPU 103 controls the first hold indicator 25A to update the first hold display when the first start condition is satisfied, and when the second start condition is satisfied, the CPU 103 controls the second hold condition. The hold display 25B is controlled to update the second hold display (step S218).

  On the side of the main board 11, when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the CPU 103, in the change pattern setting process (step S111), first determines the change category extracted in step S217. Rather than using the random number value MR3, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category is extracted again, and the numerical value data indicating the random number value MR5 for determining the variation pattern is extracted. Then, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern based on the newly extracted numerical value data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation category and the numerical value data indicating the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern. The CPU 103 that has determined the fluctuation pattern sets transmission of a fluctuation pattern designation command that specifies the fluctuation pattern that is the determination result, and executes command control processing (step S17). As a result, the variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern determined in step S111 is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. On the side of the main board 11, the CPU 103 controls the first hold indicator 25A to update the first hold display when the first start condition is satisfied, and when the second start condition is satisfied, the CPU 103 controls the second hold condition. The hold indicator 25B is controlled to update the second hold display (steps S233, S237, etc.).

  On the side of the effect control board 12 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first effect award memory display area in the pending effect determination process (step S160). The display mode (display mode at the time of addition) of the hold display at the time of additionally displaying in the 5HL or the second starting prize winning memory display area 5HR is determined. Further, the effect control CPU 120 stores the determination content of the hold effect determination process (for example, the display mode at the time of addition) in the first readahead notice buffer 194C or the second readahead notice buffer based on the determination result of the hold effect determination process. While storing (step S161), the hold display is added to the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL or the second starting prize winning memory display area 5HR based on the stored content (display mode at the time of addition) (step S162). Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, when the first start condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 controls the first hold indicator 51A to update the first hold display, and the second start condition is satisfied. In this case, the second hold indicator 51B is controlled to update the second hold display (steps S152A and S154A).

  Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 displays an active display corresponding to the variable display to be started in the active display area AHA (step. S531). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence/absence of execution of the active display change effect, the type of the active display change effect at the time of execution, the effect mode of the active display change effect, the execution timing of the active display change effect, and the like. After setting the effect control pattern based on the determination result, various effects such as the active display change effect are executed according to the effect control pattern that has been set. Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, when the first start condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 controls the first hold indicator 51A to update the first hold display and the second start condition is satisfied. In this case, the second hold indicator 51B is controlled to update the second hold display (step S536).

  Next, how the various effects are executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 40B.

  FIG. 32 is a front view of the effect unit when the versater is rotating. As shown in FIG. 32, the versatator 54 is rotated in front of the image display device 5 by the drive mechanism 53 in response to the execution of a predetermined effect. Further, the LED 545A of the versa lighter 54 is emitting light, and an afterimage of light emission of the LED 545A is generated. In addition, control of rotation and light emission of the versa writer 54 is performed by the effect control CPU 120. In this state, part or all of the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL, the second starting prize winning memory display area 5HR, and the active display area AHA are hidden by the afterimage of the light emission of the LED 545A. In this way, the first hold display in the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL, the second hold display in the second start winning prize memory display area 5HR, and the like are visually recognized by execution of the effect of rotating the versa lighter 54 in front of the image display device 5. Impossible or difficult to see. Therefore, the player cannot recognize the presence/absence of the hold storage by the first hold display in the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL and the second hold display in the second start winning prize memory display area 5HR. However, even in such a state, the first hold display on the first hold display 51A and the second hold display on the second hold display 51B of the information display unit 51 are continuously performed. Therefore, the player can recognize the presence or absence of the pending storage by these pending displays.

  Further, for example, due to a failure of the first hold indicator 25A or the second hold indicator 25B controlled by the main board 11, the first hold indicator on the first hold indicator 25A or the second hold indicator on the second hold indicator 25B. Even when the display cannot be performed, the first hold display on the first hold display 51A and the second hold display on the second hold display 51B of the information display unit 51 are performed, so that the player can The presence or absence of the pending storage can be surely grasped by the pending display.

  33A and 33B are diagrams showing a display operation example in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (d) of FIG. 33A (A) and (e) of FIG. 33B (A) are the time-series arrangement of each scene in the image display device 5. The same applies to (a) to (d) of FIG. 33A(B) and (e) of FIG. 33B(B). 33A and 33B, the arrow "↓" in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing. Further, FIGS. 33A(A) and 33B(A) show a success effect of the second system change effect, and as an effect mode of the active display change effect, the active display change effect pattern CP3 shown in FIG. 30(B). (Change present (thickness "extremely thick")) is set. Further, FIGS. 33A(B) and 33B(B) show a failure effect of the second system change effect, and as an effect mode of the active display change effect, the active display change effect pattern CP1 shown in FIG. 30(B). (No change (thickness “normal”)) is set.

  33A(A) (a) shows an active display area AHA with an active display AH (when the variable display is started, the active display area AHA is moved to a predetermined active display area AHA. (Display) is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL. It is to be noted that the active display AH is executed and the fixed decorative design (“3”, “9”, “4”) is stopped and displayed. The active display area AHA is provided in the lower central portion of the image display device 5, for example. At least the active display AH and the active display frame AHW surrounding the active display AH are displayed in the active display area AHA. It is also possible to display characters or images in the active display area AHA such as inside or outside the active display AH itself or the active display frame AHW.

  Note that, immediately before the active display AH is displayed in the active display area AHA as shown in (a) of FIG. 33A, the buffer display “1” of the first look-ahead notice buffer 194C is displayed as a hold (active display AH). The display mode (display mode at the time of addition “white”) of the hold display (active display AH) determined at the time of starting winning of the hold display (active display AH) is stored as the effect content corresponding to the first prefetch notice. In the buffer number “2” of the buffer 194C, the display mode (display mode at the time of addition “white”) of the hold display H1 determined at the time of winning a start prize of the hold display H1 is stored as the effect content corresponding to the hold display H1. In the buffer number “3” of the first look-ahead notice buffer 194C, the display mode of the hold display H2 (addition display mode “white”) determined when the winning prize for the start of the hold display H2 is given as the effect content corresponding to the hold display H2. ) Is stored in the buffer number “4” of the first prefetching advance notice buffer 194C as the effect contents corresponding to the hold display H3. It is assumed that the display mode “white”) has been stored. The same applies to FIGS. 34A to 40B.

  In the scene of FIG. 33A(A)(b), the active display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 displayed in the first start prize winning memory display area is displayed in the active display area AHA, and the active display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 is displayed. This is the scene where the variable display of AH is started. For example, it is assumed that the variation in FIG. 33A(A)(b) is a variation for executing the second system change effect as the active display change effect. 33A(A)(c) shows the case where the second system change effect is executed immediately after the variable display is started in the scene of FIG. 33A(A)(B) (for example, timing 1 in FIG. 31). This is an example. In (C) of FIG. 33A (A), an arrow Y2 in which the character "intense heat" is drawn is displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 5 as the second system change effect. FIGS. 33A(B)(a) to 33A(B)(c) are the same as FIGS. 33A(A) to 33A(A)(c). That is, the second system changes from (b) of FIG. 33A(A) to (c) of FIG. 33A(A) and from (b) of FIG. 33A(B) to (c) of FIG. 33A(B). It is a common effect that is commonly executed for the success effect and the failure effect in the effect.

  In the scene of (d) of FIG. 33A, the arrow Y2 which is the second system change effect displayed in the scene of (c) of FIG. 33A moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. , A scene in which the active display frame AHW collides. The scene (e) of FIG. 33B (A) is a scene in which the line thickness of the active display frame AHW is changed as the display mode of "extremely thick" after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW. In the scene of (e) of FIG. 33B(A), the variable display state of the decorative pattern is the reach state.

  On the other hand, in the scene (d) of FIG. 33A (B), the arrow Y2 that is the second system change effect displayed in the scene (c) of FIG. 33A (B) moves toward the bottom of the image display device 5. Then, the scene is moving to the lower portion of the image display device 5 without colliding with the active display frame AHW. In the scene (e) of FIG. 33B (B), since the arrow Y2 disappears without colliding with the active display frame AHW, the line thickness of the active display frame AHW remains unchanged from the "normal" display mode. Is. In the scene (e) of FIG. 33B (B), the variable display state of the decorative pattern is the reach state.

  34A and 34B are diagrams showing a display operation example in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (d) of FIG. 34A(A) and (e) to (f) of FIG. 34B(A) are scenes of the image display device 5 arranged in time series. . The same applies to (a) to (d) of FIG. 34A(B) and (e) to (f) of FIG. 34B(B). 34A and 34B, the arrow "↓" in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing. In addition, FIGS. 34A(A) and 34B(A) show a success effect of the first system change effect, and as an effect mode of the active display change effect, the active display change effect pattern BP4 shown in FIG. 30(A). It is assumed that (changed (shape “star”)) is set. 34A(B) and FIG. 34B(B) show a failure effect of the first system change effect, and as an effect mode of the active display change effect, the active display change effect pattern BP1 (change) shown in FIG. 30(A). It is assumed that nothing (shape “sphere”) is set.

  In the scene of (a) of FIG. 34A, the active display area AHA has an active display AH (when the variable display is started, the active display area AHA is moved to the predetermined active display area AHA. (Display) is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL. It is to be noted that the active display AH is executed and the fixed decorative design (“3”, “9”, “4”) is stopped and displayed.

  In the scene of FIG. 34A(A)(b), the active display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 displayed in the first start prize winning memory display area is displayed in the active display area AHA, and the active display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 is displayed. This is the scene where the variable display of AH is started. For example, it is assumed that the change at the time of (b) of FIG. 34A is a change for executing the first system change effect as the active display change effect. The scene of FIG. 34A(A)(b) is an example when the first system change effect is executed immediately after the start of the variable display (for example, timing 1 in FIG. 31). In FIG. 34A(B), three graphics (star Z1, triangle Z2, pentagon Z3) are displayed as a graphic group Y1 in the upper right part of the image display device 5 as the first system change effect.

  In the scene of (c) of FIG. 34A (A), the graphic group Y1 which is the first system change effect displayed in the scene of (b) of FIG. 34A moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. However, the triangle Z2 disappears, and the star Z1 and the pentagon Z3 continue to move. In the scene (d) of FIG. 34A (A), the figure group Y1 which is the first system change effect is further moved toward the lower part of the image display device 5 from the scene (c) of FIG. Of the stars Z1 and the pentagon Z3 that form the group Y1, the pentagon Z3 disappears, and only the star Z1 continues to move. 34A(B)(a) to 34A(B)(d) are similar to (a) to 34A(A)(d) in FIG. 34A(A). That is, from (b) of FIG. 34A(A) to (d) of FIG. 34A(A) and from (b) of FIG. 34A(B) to (d) of FIG. 34A(B), the first system change It is a common effect that is commonly executed for the success effect and the failure effect in the effect.

  The scene (e) of FIG. 34B (A) is a scene in which the star Z1 remaining without disappearing in the graphic group Y1 further moves toward the bottom of the image display device 5 and collides with the active display AH. is there. The scene (f) in FIG. 34B(A) is a scene in which the display shape of the active display AH is changed to “star” after the collision with the star Z1. In the scene (f) of FIG. 34B(A), the variable display state of the decorative pattern is the reach state.

  On the other hand, in the scene (e) of FIG. 34B (B), the star Z1 remaining without disappearing in the graphic group Y1 further moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5, but before colliding with the active display AH. The scene is disappearing. The scene (f) of FIG. 34B is a scene in which the display shape of the active display AH is displayed as "sphere" because the star Z1 disappears without collision. In the scene of (f) of FIG. 34B (B), the variable display state of the decorative pattern is the reach state.

  35A and 35B are diagrams showing a display operation example in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (d) of FIG. 35A(A) and (e) to (g) of FIG. 35B(A) are scenes of the image display device 5 arranged in time series. . The same applies to (a) to (d) of FIG. 35A(B) and (e) to (g) of FIG. 35B(B). 35A and 35B, the arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing. Further, FIGS. 35A(A) and 35B(A) show success effects of the first system change effect and the second system change effect, and are shown in FIG. 30(C) as effect modes of the active display change effect. It is assumed that the active display change effect pattern AP12 (changed (thickness “extremely thick”), changed (shape “star”)) is set. 35A(B) and FIG. 35B(B) show failure effects of the first system change effect and the second system change effect, and the active display shown in FIG. 30(C) as the effect mode of the active display change effect. It is assumed that the change effect pattern AP1 (no change (shape “sphere”), no change (thickness “normal”)) is set.

  In the scene of FIG. 35A(A), the active display area AHA has an active display AH (when the variable display is started, the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to a predetermined active display area AHA. (Display) is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL. It is to be noted that the active display AH is executed and the fixed decorative design (“3”, “9”, “4”) is stopped and displayed.

  In the scene of FIG. 35A(A)(b), the active display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 displayed in the first start prize winning memory display area is displayed in the active display area AHA, and the active display corresponding to the hold display H1 is displayed. This is the scene where the variable display of AH is started. For example, it is assumed that the variation in FIG. 35A(A)(b) is a variation in which the first system change effect and the second system change effect are executed as the active display change effect. FIG. 35A(A)(c) shows the first system change effect and the second system change effect immediately after the variable display is started in the scene of FIG. 35A(A)(b) (for example, timing 1 in FIG. 31). Is an example of when is executed. In FIG. 35A(A)(c), three figures (star Z1, triangle Z2, pentagon Z3) are displayed as a figure group Y1 in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 as the first system change effect, and the second system change is performed. As an effect, an arrow Y2 in which the character "intense heat" is drawn is displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 5. (A) of FIG. 35A(B) to (c) of FIG. 35A(B) are the same as (a) of FIG. 35A(A) to (c) of FIG. 35A(A). That is, the first system changes from (b) of FIG. 35A(A) to (c) of FIG. 35A(A) and from (b) of FIG. 35A(B) to (c) of FIG. 35A(B). It is a common effect that is commonly executed for the success effect and the failure effect in the effect and the second system change effect.

  In the scene of (d) of FIG. 35A (A), the graphic group Y1 which is the first system change effect displayed in the scene of (c) of FIG. 35A moves toward the bottom of the image display device 5. However, the triangle Z2 disappears, the star Z1 and the pentagon Z3 continue to move, and the arrow Y2 that is the second system change effect displayed in the scene of (c) of FIG. 35A (A) shows the image display device 5. It is a scene in which it moves toward the lower part of and collides with the active display frame AHW. In the scene (e) of FIG. 35B (A), after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW, the line thickness of the active display frame AHW changes as a display mode of "extremely thick". From the scene of 35A(A)(d), the graphic group Y1 which is the first system change effect further moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5, and among the star Z1 and the pentagon Z3 that form the graphic group Y1, This is a scene where the pentagon Z3 disappears and only the star Z1 continues to move.

  The scene (f) of FIG. 35B is a scene in which the star Z1 remaining without disappearing in the graphic group Y1 further moves toward the bottom of the image display device 5 and collides with the active display AH. is there. The scene of (g) of FIG. 35B (A) is a scene in which the display shape of the active display AH is changed to “star” after the collision with the star Z1. In the scene (g) of FIG. 35B(A), the variable display state of the decorative pattern is the reach state.

  On the other hand, in the scene (d) of FIG. 34A (B), the arrow Y2 that is the second system change effect displayed in the scene (c) of FIG. 34A (B) moves toward the bottom of the image display device 5. Then, the scene is moving to the lower portion of the image display device 5 without colliding with the active display frame AHW. In addition, in the scene (e) of FIG. 35A (B), the figure group Y1 which is the first system change effect is further moved toward the lower part of the image display device 5 from the scene (d) of FIG. 35A (B). Of the star Z1 and the pentagon Z3 forming the graphic group Y1, the pentagon Z3 disappears and only the star Z1 continues to move. In the scene (f) of FIG. 35B (B), the star Z1 remaining without disappearing in the figure group Y1 further moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5, but disappears before colliding with the active display AH. It is a scene. The scene of (g) of FIG. 35B is a scene in which the display shape of the active display AH is displayed as "sphere" because the star Z1 disappears without collision. In the scene of (g) of FIG. 35B (B), the variable display state of the decorative pattern is the reach state.

  36A and 36B are diagrams showing a display operation example in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (d) of FIG. 36A(A) and (e) to (f) of FIG. 36B(A) are scenes of the image display device 5 arranged in time series. .. The same applies to (a) to (d) of FIG. 36B and (e) to (f) of FIG. 36B(B). 36A and 36B, the arrow "↓" in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative pattern is changing. Further, FIGS. 36A(A) and 36B(A) show a success effect of the second system change effect, and as an effect mode of the active display change effect, the active display change effect pattern CP3 shown in FIG. 30(B). (Change present (thickness "extremely thick")) is set. Further, FIGS. 36A(B) and 36B(B) show a failure effect of the second system change effect, and as an effect mode of the active display change effect, the active display change effect pattern CP1 shown in FIG. 30(B). (No change (thickness “normal”)) is set.

  In the scene of (a) of FIG. 36A, the active display area AHA has an active display AH (when the variable display is started, the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to a predetermined active display area AHA. (Display) is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL. It is to be noted that the active display AH is executed and the fixed decorative design (“3”, “9”, “4”) is stopped and displayed.

  In the scene of FIG. 36A(A)(b), the active display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 displayed in the first start prize winning memory display area is displayed in the active display area AHA, and the active display corresponding to the hold display H1 is displayed. This is the scene where the variable display of AH is started. For example, it is assumed that the variation in FIG. 36A(A)(b) is the variation for executing the second system change effect as the active display change effect. FIG. 36A(A)(c) is a scene in which the variable display state of the decorative pattern is in the reach state after the variable display is started in the scene of FIG. 36A(A)(b). The scene of (d) of FIG. 36A(A) is an example when the second system change effect is executed after the reach is established (for example, timing 3 in FIG. 30). In (d) of FIG. 36A (A), an arrow Y2 in which the character “intense heat” is drawn is displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 5 as the second system change effect. 36A(B) (a) to FIG. 36A(B) (d) are similar to FIG. 36A(A) (a) to FIG. 36A(A) (d). That is, (b) in FIG. 36A(A) to (d) in FIG. 36A(A) and (b) in FIG. 36A(B) to (d) in FIG. 36A(B) change the second system. It is a common effect that is commonly executed for the success effect and the failure effect in the effect.

  In the scene of (e) of FIG. 36A, the arrow Y2 which is the second system change effect displayed in the scene of (d) of FIG. 36A moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. , A scene in which the active display frame AHW collides. In the scene (f) of FIG. 36B (A), the line thickness of the active display frame AHW is “extremely thick” after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW in the scene (e) of FIG. 36A (A). It is a scene in which the display mode is changing.

  On the other hand, in the scene (e) of FIG. 36A (B), the arrow Y2 that is the second system change effect displayed in the scene (d) of FIG. 36A (B) moves toward the bottom of the image display device 5. Then, the scene is moving to the lower portion of the image display device 5 without colliding with the active display frame AHW. In the scene (f) of FIG. 36B, since the arrow Y2 disappears without colliding with the active display frame AHW, the line thickness of the active display frame AHW remains unchanged from the "normal" display mode. Is.

  Note that the first system change effect, the first system change effect, and the second system change effect may be executed after the reach is established as in the above case.

  37A and 37B are diagrams showing a display operation example in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (f) of FIG. 37A and (g) to (i) of FIG. 37B show the scenes of the image display device 5 arranged in time series. 37A and 37B, the arrow "↓" in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing. 37A and 37B show a success effect of the second system change effect, and as an effect mode of the active display change effect, the active display change effect pattern CP3 shown in (B) of FIG. "Thick")) is set. Here, the display operation examples shown in FIGS. 37A and 37B are different from the display operation examples shown in FIGS. 33A and 33B in that they are pseudo continuous fluctuations. The other parts are the same, and the description will focus on the different parts. Further, the description of the failure effect is omitted.

  In the scene (a) of FIG. 37A, the active display area AHA has an active display AH (the active display obtained by moving the hold display corresponding to the variable display to a predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started). It is a scene in which the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL.

  In the scene of (c) of FIG. 37A, after the variable display is started in the scene of (b) of FIG. 37A, the variable display state of the decorative pattern is different from the reach state, and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. Is. In the scene of (d) of FIG. 37A, the chance symbol described as "opportunity" appears in the decorative symbol display area 5C by low speed scrolling, and the chance symbol is temporarily stopped in the scene of (e) of FIG. 37A. Then, in the scene of (f) of FIG. 37A, all temporarily stopped decorative designs are variably displayed (revariable display) again.

  In (g) of FIG. 37B, an arrow Y2 in which the character "intense heat" is drawn is displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 5 as the second system change effect. FIG. 37A (a) to FIG. 37B (g) are common effects that are commonly executed in the success effect and the failure effect in the second system change effect. In the scene (h) of FIG. 37B, the arrow Y2, which is the second system change effect displayed in the scene (g) of FIG. 37B, moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5 and becomes the active display frame AHW. It is a scene of a collision. The scene of (i) in FIG. 37B is a scene in which the line thickness of the active display frame AHW is changed as the display mode of "extremely thick" after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW. In the scene of (i) of FIG. 37B, the variable display state of the decorative pattern is the reach state.

  38A and 38B are diagrams showing a display operation example in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (f) of FIG. 38A and (g) to (j) of FIG. 38B are the time-series arrangement of the scenes on the image display device 5. 38A and 38B, the arrow "↓" in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing. 38A and 38B show a success effect of the second system change effect, and as an effect mode of the active display change effect, the active display change effect pattern CP3 (changed (thickness) is shown in FIG. 30B). "Thick")) is set. Here, the display operation examples shown in FIGS. 38A and 38B are different from the display operation examples shown in FIGS. 33A and 33B in that they are pseudo continuous fluctuations. The other parts are the same, and the description will focus on the different parts. Further, the description of the failure effect is omitted.

  In the scene of (a) of FIG. 38A, the active display area AHA has an active display AH (active display obtained by moving the hold display corresponding to the variable display to a predetermined active display area AHA when starting the variable display). It is a scene in which the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL.

  The scene of (c) of FIG. 38A is a scene in which the variable display state of the decorative pattern is the reach state after the variable display is started in the scene of (b) of FIG. 38A. In the scene (d) of FIG. 38A, the chance symbol described as “opportunity” appears in the decorative symbol display area 5C by low-speed scrolling, and the chance symbol is temporarily stopped in the scene (e) of FIG. 38A. Then, in the scene of (f) of FIG. 38A, all the temporarily stopped decorative patterns are variably displayed (revariable display) again.

  In (f) of FIG. 38A, an arrow Y2 in which the character “intense heat” is drawn is displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 5 as the second system change effect. 38A to (f) of FIG. 38A are common effects that are commonly executed in the success effect and the failure effect in the second system change effect. In the scene (g) of FIG. 38B, the arrow Y2 that is the second system change effect displayed in the scene (f) of FIG. 38B moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5 and becomes the active display frame AHW. It is a scene of a collision. In the scene of (h) of FIG. 38B, after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW, the line thickness of the active display frame AHW is changed as the display mode of "extremely thick". In the scene of (h) of FIG. 38B, the variable display state of the decorative pattern is the reach state. In the scene of (i) of FIG. 38B, after the line thickness of the active display frame AHW is changed to the display mode of “extremely thick”, a chance pattern appears in the decorative pattern display area 5C, and the scene of (j) of FIG. 38B. In this, the variable display state of the decorative design is determined as the reach state without the chance design temporarily stopping in the decorative design display area 5C.

  39A and 39B are diagrams showing a display operation example in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (f) of FIG. 39A and (g) to (i) of FIG. 39B show the scenes of the image display device 5 arranged in time series. 39A and 39B, the arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is changing. 39A and 39B show a success effect of the second system change effect, and as an effect mode of the active display change effect, the active display change effect pattern CP3 shown in FIG. "Thick")) is set. Here, the reach operation timing differs between the display operation example shown in FIGS. 39A and 39B and the display operation example shown in FIGS. 38A and 38B. The other parts are the same, and the description will focus on the different parts. Further, the description of the failure effect is omitted.

  In (a) of FIG. 39A, an active display AH is displayed in the active display area AHA (active display obtained by moving a hold display corresponding to the variable display to a predetermined active display area AHA when starting the variable display). , Is a scene in which the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL.

  In the scene of (c) of FIG. 39A, after the variable display is started in the scene of (b) of FIG. 39A, the character “intense heat” is drawn in the upper left portion of the image display device 5 as the second system change effect. This is the scene in which the arrow Y2 is displayed. 39A to 39C are common effects that are commonly executed by the success effect and the failure effect in the second system change effect. In the scene (d) of FIG. 39A, the arrow Y2 that is the second system change effect displayed in the scene (c) of FIG. 39B moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5 and becomes the active display frame AHW. It is a scene of a collision. The scene (e) of FIG. 39A is a scene in which the line thickness of the active display frame AHW has changed as a display mode of "extremely thick" after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW. In the scene of (e) of FIG. 39B, the decorative design is stopped and displayed in a display state where the variable display state of the decorative design is different from the reach state.

  In the scene of (f) of FIG. 39A, the chance symbol described as “opportunity” appears in the decorative symbol display area 5C by slow scrolling, and in the scene of (g) of FIG. 39B, the chance symbol is temporarily stopped. Then, in the scene of (h) of FIG. 39B, all the temporarily stopped decorative patterns are variably displayed (revariable display) again. In the scene of (i) of FIG. 39B, the pseudo continuous variation is ended and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is the reach state.

  40A and 40B are diagrams showing a display operation example in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (f) of FIG. 40A and (g) to (i) of FIG. 40B show the scenes of the image display device 5 arranged in time series. 40A and 40B, the arrow "↓" in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative pattern is changing. 40A and 40B show a success effect of the second system change effect, and as an effect mode of the active display change effect, the active display change effect pattern CP3 shown in FIG. 30B (change present (thickness) "Thick")) is set. Here, the reach operation timing differs between the display operation example shown in FIGS. 40A and 40B and the display operation example shown in FIGS. 39A and 39B. The other parts are the same, and the description will focus on the different parts. Further, the description of the failure effect is omitted.

  In (a) of FIG. 40A, an active display AH is displayed in the active display area AHA (an active display obtained by moving a hold display corresponding to the variable display to a predetermined active display area AHA when the variable display is started). , Is a scene in which the hold display H1, the hold display H2, and the hold display H3 are displayed in the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL.

  In the scene of (c) of FIG. 40A, after the variable display is started in the scene of (b) of FIG. 40A, the character “intense heat” is drawn in the upper left portion of the image display device 5 as the second system change effect. This is the scene where the arrow Y2 is displayed. 40A to 40C are common effects that are commonly executed by the success effect and the failure effect in the second system change effect. In the scene (d) of FIG. 40A, the arrow Y2, which is the second system change effect displayed in the scene (c) of FIG. 40B, moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5 and becomes the active display frame AHW. It is a scene of a collision. The scene (e) of FIG. 40A is a scene in which the line thickness of the active display frame AHW has changed as a display mode of "extremely thick" after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW. In the scene of (e) of FIG. 40B, the variable display state of the decorative pattern is the reach state.

  In the scene of (f) of FIG. 40A, the chance symbol described as “opportunity” appears in the decorative symbol display area 5C by low-speed scrolling, and the chance symbol is temporarily stopped in the scene of (g) of FIG. 40B. Then, in the scene of (h) of FIG. 40B, all the temporarily stopped decorative patterns are variably displayed (revariable display) again. In the scene of (i) of FIG. 40B, the pseudo continuous fluctuation is finished and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is the reach state.

  Here, in FIGS. 40A and 40B, examples of scenes in which the variable display state of the decorative design is the reach state include (e) of FIG. 40A and (i) of FIG. 40B. In the case where the pseudo continuous fluctuation occurs after the reach is established, "timing 3" in FIG. 31 is treated as the timing of (i) in FIG. 40B. That is, the establishment of the reach in FIGS. 40A and 40B is the scene of (i) in FIG. 40B in which the pseudo continuous variation is finished and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is the reach state.

  33 to 40, the success effect may be executed at the timing at which the active display change effect (first system change effect, second system change effect, first system change effect, and second system change effect) is executed. When the degree of expectation is different and, for example, there is an active display change effect executed at the first timing and an active display change effect executed at the second timing later than the first timing in the change, the change is executed at the second timing. This indicates that there is a high degree of expectation that a successful effect in the active display change effect will be executed.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL, the second starting prize memory display area. 5HR, the 1st reservation indicator 51A and the 2nd reservation indicator 51B are provided. For example, on the first hold indicator 25A, the first special figure hold storage number (the first special figure game hold number) based on the hold data (first special figure hold information) is displayed in a specifiable manner (the first hold memory is displayed). (Display) The first hold display is performed. In the first start winning a prize memory display area 5HL, the first hold display is performed similarly to the first hold display 25A. On the first hold indicator 51A, the first hold display is performed as in the case of the first hold indicator 25A and the first starting prize winning memory display area 5HL. Further, the second hold display 25B, the second starting prize winning memory display area 5HR, and the second hold display 51B display the second hold display. The first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B are controlled by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. Further, the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL, the second starting winning prize memory display area 5HR, the first hold indicator 51A and the second hold indicator 51B are controlled by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12. It With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the recognizability of the presence or absence of the pending storage.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, during execution of the variable display, the corresponding display (for example, the active display AH or the active display frame AHW surrounding the active display AH) is predetermined. Special image display means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control that executes the process of step S531) that can be displayed in an area (for example, active display area AHA) and the display mode of the corresponding display are changed during execution of variable display. A common effect that is commonly executed when the display mode of the corresponding display is not changed (for example, in the first system change effect, the effect before the graphic group Y1 collides with the active display, or the second system). In the change effect, the effect until the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame surrounding the active display) and the success effect of changing the display mode of the corresponding display after executing the common effect (for example, in the first system change effect) , In an effect in which one of the shapes "star" of the figure group Y1 collides with the active display and changes to the display mode of the star, or in the second system change effect, the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame and the active display is performed. Effects in which the line thickness of the frame changes, effects in which both the first system change effect and the second system change effect are executed to change the display mode such as the active display and the active display frame) or corresponding display Of the failure display that does not change the display mode (for example, in the first system change display, the display mode of the active display does not change and disappears before any figure of the shape “star” of the figure group Y1 collides with the active display. In the effect and the second system change effect, the arrow Y2 disappears before the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame and the line thickness of the active display frame does not change, and these first system change effects Production control means capable of executing both the second system change production and performing active display or one that does not change the display mode of one or both of the active display frames (for example, production control for executing active display change production). CPU 120 for example) and a plurality of timings (for example, timing 1 to timing 4) during execution of the variable display, and the success effect is generated according to which timing the common effect is executed. The execution rate is different (see, for example, FIG. 31 ).

  With such a configuration, the gaming machine can focus attention on the execution timing of the common effect that fuels whether the display mode of the active display AH or the active display frame AHW corresponding to the variable display is changed. In addition, the gaming machine can improve the player's expectation by paying attention to the execution timing.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 32, the effect of rotating the versa lighter 54 in front of the image display device 5 is executed, and the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL and the second start are executed. When the winning storage display area 5HR is hidden by the light emission afterimage of the LED 545A, the first hold display and the second hold display on the first hold display 51A and the second hold display 51B are maintained. As described above, the first hold display in the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL and the second hold display in the second start winning prize memory display area 5HR are erased in accordance with the execution of the effect of rotating the versa lighter 54 in front of the image display device 5. Even if it is done, the first hold display on the first hold display 51A and the second hold display on the second hold display 51B are maintained, so that the player can grasp the presence or absence of the hold memory, False positives can be suppressed. Further, without considering whether or not the hold display in the starting winning prize memory display area 5H (the first starting winning prize memory display area 5HL, the second starting winning prize memory display area 5HR) is erased, the accessory such as the versa lighter 54 or the like. Since it is possible to execute the effect using, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of the effect.

  It should be noted that the phrase "the hold display in the starting prize winning memory display area 5H is erased" means that the hold display in the starting prize winning memory display area 5H is not visually recognizable due to the operation of the accessory such as the versa lighter 54 as described in the above embodiment. Alternatively, in addition to the case where it is difficult to visually recognize, an effect using the entire display area of the image display device 5, an effect that acts on a hold display in the start winning award memory display area 5H, and an effect that the entire display area of the image display device 5 is completely dark. (Dimening effect), when the hold display in the start winning award memory display area 5H becomes invisible or difficult to visually recognize due to execution of an effect such as temporarily turning off the hold display in the start winning award memory display area 5H, an image display device The case where the visibility of the hold display in the start winning award memory display area 5H is reduced due to the violent effect in 5 or the first lamp 9 emitting light is included.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2(B), the first hold indicator 51A, the second hold indicator 51B, the fourth symbol indicator 51D and the fourth symbol indicator 51E. Are provided on the display substrate 51K. In this way, the first hold indicator 51A, the second hold indicator 51B, the fourth symbol indicator 51D and the fourth symbol indicator 51E are arranged and integrated in common electric components such as one display substrate 51K. By doing so, the production cost can be reduced. Moreover, since the 1st reservation display device 51A, the 2nd reservation display device 51B, the 4th design display device 51D, and the 4th design display device 51E can be confirmed collectively, the display on each display device becomes easy. Note that, in the "arrangement in mutually common electric components", in addition to the arrangement in the one display substrate 51K, for example, a unit (packaged) including a hold indicator and a fourth symbol indicator is provided. By using the electric component, it is included that the hold indicator and the fourth symbol indicator are arranged in the common electric component.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2B, the first hold indicator 51A and the second hold indicator 51B are provided on the display substrate 51K. By integrating the first hold indicator 51A and the second hold indicator 51B in this manner, the production cost can be reduced. Moreover, since the first hold indicator 51A and the second hold indicator 51B can be collectively checked, the display on each indicator can be easily grasped.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-mentioned embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the first hold indicator 51A and the second hold indicator 51B are more than the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B. , Is provided at a position close to the image display device 5. That is, the distance between the image display device 5 and the first hold indicator 51A and the second hold indicator 51B is the distance between the image display device 5 and the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B. It is shorter than. In this way, since the first hold indicator 51A and the second hold indicator 51B are closer to the image display device 5 than the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B, it is easy to grasp the hold memory.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the information display section 51, which is a decoration of the image display device 5, is provided near the upper side of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. The information display section 51 includes a first hold indicator 51A and a second hold indicator 51B. As described above, since the first hold indicator 51A and the second hold indicator 51B are provided in the information display section 51 provided near the upper side of the image display device 5, the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator are provided. It is closer to the image display device 5 than the display device 25B, and it becomes easy to grasp the pending storage.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4(B), the first hold indicator 51A has a light-emitting mode when the “holding” is held when the first special figure game is held. , The red lighting state in which the number of LEDs corresponding to the number of the first special figure reservation storages lights in red. As shown in FIG. 4(C), the fourth symbol display device 51D configures the fourth symbol display device 51D as a light emitting mode when the "first special symbol fluctuation is in progress" during execution of the first special symbol game. The LED will blink red and the LED will blink red. Further, the second hold indicator 51B lights up in blue when the number of LEDs corresponding to the number of the second special figure hold storage is lighted in blue as a light emitting mode when "holding" in which the second special figure game is held. It becomes a state. As shown in FIG. 4(C), the fourth symbol display device 51E configures the fourth symbol display device 51E as a light emitting mode when the "second special symbol fluctuation is in progress" during execution of the second special symbol game. The LED will blink in blue and will be in a blue blinking state. In this way, the first hold indicator 51A and the fourth symbol indicator 51D can display light emission in red, which is a common luminescent color, and the second hold indicator 51B and the fourth symbol indicator 51E, Blue light, which is a common light emission color, can be used for light emission display. Therefore, the hold display and the fourth symbol are related to each other, and the hold memory is easily grasped.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4(B), the first hold indicator 51A has a light-emitting mode when the “holding” is held when the first special figure game is held. , The red lighting state in which the number of LEDs corresponding to the number of the first special figure reservation storages lights in red. As shown in FIG. 4(A), the first hold indicator 25A has a number of LEDs corresponding to the number of the first special map hold storages as a light emitting mode when the hold is on for the first special drawing game. Lights up in red, and the red light is turned on. Further, the second hold indicator 51B lights up in blue when the number of LEDs corresponding to the number of the second special figure hold storage is lighted in blue as a light emitting mode when "holding" in which the second special figure game is held. It becomes a state. As shown in FIG. 4(A), the second hold indicator 25B has a number of LEDs corresponding to the second special figure hold storage number as a light emitting mode when "holding", which means that the second special figure game is held. Lights up in blue and lights in blue. In this way, the first hold indicator 51A and the first hold indicator 25A can perform light emission display in red, which is a common light emission color, and the second hold indicator 51B and the second hold indicator 25B are mutually Blue light, which is a common light emission color, can be used for light emission display. Therefore, the hold display becomes relevant, and it becomes easy to grasp the hold storage.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above-mentioned embodiment, and it is possible to solve at least one problem in the related art, and the part described in the above-mentioned embodiment It may be provided with the structure of.

(Modification)
The display mode of the hold display does not have to be a display mode showing the degree of expectation for a big hit as shown in FIG. 26, and a normal mode that is a normal (default, initial color) display mode and a special mode different from the normal mode And a first special aspect and a second special aspect that are different from the normal aspect and the special aspect. This will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 41, 42 and 43.

  For example, instead of the determination rate of the display mode of the hold display shown in FIG. 26, another setting example of the determination rate of the display mode of the hold display shown in FIG. 41 may be used. FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating another example of setting the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display. It should be noted that the ROM 121 may store seven types of hold display mode determination tables according to the variation category. FIG. 41(A) is a hold display mode selected when the variation category is “PA1 (shortening/non-reach loss)” or the variation category “PA2 (non-reach (loss))” among the seven types described above. It is a setting example (H-TBL1) of the determination rate of the display mode of the hold display by the determination table. FIG. 41(B) is a setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PA3 (normal reach (miss))” among the above-described seven types ( H-TBL 2). FIG. 41C shows the setting of the determination rate of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PA4 (super reach α (miss))” among the seven types described above. It is an example (H-TBL3).

  FIG. 41D is a setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PA5 (super reach β (miss)” among the seven types described above. 41(E) is a display of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PB3 (normal reach (big hit))” among the above-mentioned seven types. 41(F) is an example of setting the determination rate of the mode (H-TBL5), which is selected when the variation category is “PB4 (super reach α (big hit))” among the above-described seven types. 41G is a setting example (H-TBL6) of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display based on the display mode determination table. Is a setting example (H-TBL7) of the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display according to the hold display mode determination table selected when "".

  Comparing FIG. 41 and FIG. 26, it is different in that a part of the determination ratio for “white” in each of the pending display mode determination tables in FIG. 26 is assigned to “gray” in FIG. 41. Specifically, the determination ratio for "white" in each of the pending display mode determination tables is 4:1 for the "white" and "grey" determination ratios for each of the pending display mode determination tables of FIG. This is a setting example in which the determination ratio is assigned as described above. In this setting example, “white” is a display mode (normal mode) of normal hold display, and “gray” is a special mode different from the normal mode. The special mode has the same degree of expectation for the big hit as the normal mode, but when the "gray" hold display becomes the active display, the percentage of executing the active display change effect that changes the display mode of the active display is This is a display mode indicating that it is high.

  Further, in the setting example, unlike the normal mode and the special mode, the expectation level for the big hit is different (for example, the expectation degree for the big hit is higher than the normal mode and the special mode), which is the first special mode, or the normal mode. Different from the aspect and the special aspect, the expectation for the big hit is different (for example, the expectation for the big hit is higher than the first special aspect), which is the second special aspect, or unlike the normal aspect and the special aspect, it is for the big hit. The third special aspect such as red, which has a different expectation degree (for example, the expectation degree for a big hit is higher than the second special aspect), may be included.

  For example, in the first hold effect determination process (step S160), the effect control CPU 120, based on the change category designated by the change category command transmitted from the main board 11, a plurality of hold display modes shown in FIG. The hold display mode determination table to be used is selected from the determination tables, and is added to the first start winning a prize memory display area 5HL based on the selected hold display mode determination table and the random value MR6 for determining the display mode of the hold display. The display mode (display mode at the time of addition) of the hold display to be displayed may be determined.

  After executing the first hold effect determination process (step S160), the effect control CPU 120 stores the determination content of the first hold effect determination process based on the determination result of the first hold effect determination process (step). S161). Specifically, for example, the effect control CPU 120 sets the display mode of the hold display in the first hold effect determination process to the first start winning prize reception command buffer 194A corresponding to the buffer number of the first start prize. The determination content (display mode at the time of addition) of the first hold effect determination processing is stored in association with the buffer number of the prefetching announcement buffer 194C.

  After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 displays the hold display determined in the first hold effect determination process (step S160) (the first start winning command command reception buffer 194A). A new hold display is added to the first start winning a prize memory display area 5HL based on the display mode at the time of addition stored corresponding to the buffer number of the first look-ahead notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number of the starting prize. The first hold addition process is executed (step S162). More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first start winning award storage display area 5HL to display a hold display in the additional display mode stored in association with the buffer number of the first prefetching notice buffer 194C described above. By setting the control pattern as the usage pattern and transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, the first hold effect The hold display according to the display mode at the time of addition determined in the determination processing is added to the first start prize winning memory display area 5HL.

  Then, in the process of step S532 in the effect execution setting process of FIG. 28, a process of determining whether or not to execute the active display change effect for the active display corresponding to the variation, or a case of executing the active display change effect, In the process of determining whether to execute the active display change effect, in the case of active display (variation) for executing the active display change effect, the process of determining the effect mode of the active display change effect to be executed, and in the change A process of determining the timing of executing the active display change effect, a process of setting (or resetting) the effect control pattern based on the selection result of the active display change effect, and the like are executed.

  Here, the effect execution setting process (step S532) will be described in detail. First, a process of determining whether to execute an active display change effect for the active display corresponding to the variation, and a process of determining which active display change effect to execute when the active display change effect is executed will be described. To do. When using the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display shown in FIG. 41, the active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table shown in FIG. 42 may be used instead of the active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table shown in FIG. . Here, the example of setting the determination rate based on the active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table shown in FIG. 29 and the example of setting the determination rate based on the active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table shown in FIG. The difference is that, depending on whether or not the display mode of the display is the special mode, a setting example of the determination rate by another active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table is referred to.

  FIG. 42 is a diagram showing another example of setting the determination rate by the active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table. Specifically, FIG. 42(A) is an example of setting the determination ratio by the active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table that is referred to when the display mode of the active display corresponding to the variation is not the special mode (gray). 42(B) is an example of setting the determination rate by the active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table that is referred to when the display mode of the active display corresponding to the variation is the special mode (gray). Each of the setting examples shown in FIGS. 42(A) and 42(B) is similar to the setting example shown in FIG. 29, whether or not to execute the active display change effect, and when executing the active display change effect. It is an example of setting the determination rate of the effect mode of the active display change effect.

  Each of the setting examples shown in FIGS. 42(A) and 42(B) is compared with a random number value MR7 (not shown) for determining whether or not to execute the active display change effect in the active/display change effect execution/non-execution determination table. Numerical values (determined values) are assigned to “executed” and “not executed” at determined rates as shown in FIGS. 42A and 42B, respectively. In addition, in the "execution" of the active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR7 (not shown) for determining the active display change effect execution presence/absence is "first system". Change effect", "second system change effect", and "first system change effect and second system change effect" are respectively determined as shown in FIGS. 42(A) and 42(B). Allocated in percentage.

  It should be noted that “execution available” and “first system change effect” indicate that the first system change effect is performed as an active display change effect, and “execution enabled” and “second system change effect” indicate the second system change effect. This means that it is performed as an active display change effect, and “execution present”, “first system change effect and second system change effect” means that both the change effects of the first system change effect and the second system change effect are changed by active display change. Indicates that the performance will be performed. Further, "no execution" represents that the active display change effect is not performed. Further, the fluctuation pattern 1-X represents the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 shown in FIG. 7, and the fluctuation pattern PA2-X represents any of the fluctuation patterns PA2-1, PA2-2, PA2-3 shown in FIG. , The fluctuation pattern PA3-X represents one of the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 shown in FIG. 7, and the fluctuation pattern PA4 is the fluctuation patterns PA4-1, PA4-2, PA4-3 shown in FIG. Represents any of PA4-4. The same applies to the fluctuation patterns PA5-X, PB4-X, PB5-X.

  According to FIG. 42, when the variation pattern (variable display pattern) of the variation (variable display) designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation patterns PA1-X and PA2-X, "no execution" is 100. %, which means that none of the first system change effect, the second system change effect, the first system change effect, and the second system change effect is executed. Further, when the active display change effect is executed (in the case of “execution enabled” in FIG. 42(A) and FIG. 42(B)), when the hot reach (eg, super reach) is reached, the reach that is not hot (eg, normal reach) ), the rate at which the first system change effect is executed is higher than that in the second system change effect. Further, when the variation pattern is “big hit”, the ratio of the first system change effect to be executed is higher than that to the second system change effect, compared to when the variation pattern is “miss”. Further, when the hot reach (for example, super reach) is performed, the ratio of execution of both the first system change effect and the second system change effect is higher than when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach). ing. Further, when the variation pattern is “big hit”, the ratio of execution of both the first system change effect and the second system change effect is higher than when “variable”.

  Further, depending on whether or not the active display corresponding to the change is in the special mode, the determination rate of whether or not to execute the active display change effect is different, and when the active display corresponding to the change is the special mode, the change The determination rate at which the active display change effect is executed is higher than that in the case where the active display corresponding to is not a special mode.

  Further, a case where the special mode as shown in FIG. 29 is not considered, a case where the special mode as shown in FIG. 42(A) is considered and the active display corresponding to the variation is not the special mode, and FIG. When the active display corresponding to the variation is a special mode in consideration of the special mode as shown in FIG. 42 and the respective cases are compared, the determination rate by the active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table shown in FIG. , The active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table shown in FIG. 29, and the active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table shown in FIG. ing.

  That is, in the effect execution setting process (step S532), the effect control CPU 120 specifies the active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table, the random value MR7 for determining whether the active display change effect execution is performed, and the variation pattern designation command. Whether or not to execute the active display change effect depending on the change pattern (variable display pattern) of the change (the variable display), and when the active display change effect is executed, the effect mode of the plurality of active display change effects is set. Of these, which active display change effect is to be executed is determined.

  Note that the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the active display change effect, and when it is determined to be “executed”, “first system change effect”, “second system change effect”, or “first system change effect”. And the second system change effect" may be determined.

  The figure group Y1 displayed as the first system change effect may be determined such that the degree of expectation for a big hit changes depending on the combination of figures that form the figure group Y1. This will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a setting example of the determination rate by the first system detailed pattern determination table when executing the first system change effect. In each setting example shown in FIG. 43, the first system detailed pattern determination table of the first system change effect has, for example, 10 types of first system detailed patterns SHP1 corresponding to combinations of three figures of a triangle, a pentagon, and a star. ~ SHP10 is included. This first system detailed pattern is the case where only the first system change effect is executed (when it is determined to be one of the active display change effect patterns BP1 to BP4 in FIG. 30A), and the first system change effect. It is referred to when both the second system change effect is executed (when any one of the active display change effect patterns AP1 to AP12 in FIG. 30C is determined).

  In this first system detailed pattern, the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR8 (not shown) for determining the first system detailed pattern is determined by the active display change effect pattern at a determination rate as shown in FIG. It is assigned.

  It is assumed that the ROM 121 stores the first system detailed patterns as the production modes of the ten types of first system change productions corresponding to the 16 types of active display change production patterns shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 43, the first system detailed pattern “SHP1” is an effect pattern when all the three graphics forming the graphics group Y1 are triangular. According to the illustrated example, AP1 to AP3 and BP1 have a high determination rate determined when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach) in FIG. 30, and when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach), The determination rate determined by the first system detailed pattern SHP1 is higher than that when hot reach (for example, super reach) is performed. In addition, the active display change effect pattern determined in FIG. 30 determines the display mode of the active display corresponding to the variation, and the first system detail that can be the display mode of the active display corresponding to the determined variation. The pattern is determined.

  Similarly, the first system detailed pattern "SHP2" is an effect pattern when the three figures configuring the figure group Y1 are pentagons, triangles, and triangles, and the first system detailed pattern "SHP3" is a figure. The three patterns that form the group Y1 are pentagons, pentagons, and triangles, and the first system detailed pattern "SHP4" is a three-pattern graphic that forms the group Y1 of pentagons, pentagons, and pentagons. The first system detailed pattern "SHP5" is a production pattern when the three figures forming the figure group Y1 are composed of stars, triangles, and triangles. The detailed pattern "SHP6" is an effect pattern when the three figures forming the figure group Y1 are formed of stars, pentagons, and triangles, and the first system detailed pattern "SHP7" forms the figure group Y1. One figure is an effect pattern when it is composed of a star, a pentagon, and a pentagon. In the first system detailed pattern “SHP8”, the three figures that form the figure group Y1 are composed of stars, stars, triangles, and triangles. The first system detailed pattern "SHP9" is an effect pattern when three figures forming the figure group Y1 are composed of stars, stars, and pentagons, and the first system detailed pattern "SHP10". "Is an effect pattern when all of the three figures forming the figure group Y1 are formed of stars. According to the illustrated example, the degree of expectation that the success effect can be executed varies depending on the combination of the graphics forming the graphic group Y1.

  41 and 42, when considering the special mode, when performing the active display change effect on the active display corresponding to the hold display displayed in the special mode, the common effect described above is used. , May be executed as a suggestion effect suggesting a success effect and a failure effect, or a suggestion effect suggesting an active display change effect for an active display corresponding to a hold display displayed in a special mode (for example, success effect and failure effect. The suggestive effect suggesting a common effect that is commonly executed with the effect) may be executed in the same or different manner.

  In addition, when considering the special mode as shown in FIG. 41 and FIG. 42, the active display change effect with respect to the active display has been described. In some cases, the hold change effect executed in the same or different effect mode as the active display change effect may be executed for the hold display displayed in the special mode.

  Note that, in FIG. 43, in the graphic group Y1 initially configured (combined), the graphic to be deleted in the common effect may be deleted from the graphic in the active display display mode with low expectation. For example, when the first system detailed pattern SHP6 is determined as the success effect, the display mode after the success effect is executed in the figure group including the three figures of “star”, “pentagon”, and “triangle” Of the two other than the figure (eg, “pentagon”), the figure with low expectations (eg, “triangle”) is deleted first, and then the figure with low expectations (eg, “star”) is deleted. However, if it is a failure production, in the figure group consisting of three figures of “star”, “pentagon”, and “triangle”, “triangle”, “pentagon”, and “star” in that order It may be deleted.

  Further, in the gaming machine 1, the plurality of timings at which the common effect may be executed may include before and after the reach display mode forming a part of the specific display result is displayed.

  With such a configuration, the gaming machine can improve the player's expectation before and after the reach display mode is displayed (before and after the reach is established).

  Further, in the gaming machine 1, the common effect is provided at a second timing after the first timing of the variable display, as compared with the case where the common presentation is performed at the first timing of the variable display of the identification information being executed. When executed, the success effect may be executed at a higher rate.

  With such a configuration, the player's expectation can be improved over a longer period from the first half to the second half of the variable display of the identification information being executed.

  Further, in the gaming machine 1, a pre-decision means (for example, in the processing of step S412 by the CPU 103, a special figure display result and a pending storage) are determined before the display result of the variable display is determined and displayed or not. 19 is selected from among the plurality of variation category determination tables shown in FIG. 19, and the variation category is determined based on the selected variation category determination table and the variation category determination random value MR3. Stored in the holding storage means before the determination of the special figure display result or the jackpot type) and the determination of the pre-determination means in the winning random number determination processing of step S220). Specific determination means for determining whether or not the display result of the variable display based on the hold information is the specific display result (for example, in the special symbol normal process of step S110, the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is “big hit”). Or a process of deciding whether or not to make a "small hit" before the variable display result is derived and displayed), and a plurality of types of hold displays corresponding to the hold information determined by the specific determination means. One of the display modes of the effect display means capable of executing the pending notice effect displayed in any one of the display modes, and the suggestion effect execution means capable of executing the suggestion effect indicating whether or not the display mode of the hold display changes. The display mode of the hold display includes a normal mode, a special mode different from the normal mode, and a first special mode and a second special mode which are modes different from the normal mode and the special mode, and The effect execution means displays the hold display corresponding to the hold information which is the determination target of the specific determination means in different ratios in the first special mode or the second special mode according to the determination result of the specific determination means. Further, it is possible to change and display the hold display in the first special mode or the second special mode at a plurality of timings, and in the suggestion effect executing means, the hold display is the special mode. When it is displayed, the suggestion effect may be executed more frequently than when the hold display is not displayed in the special mode.

  With such a configuration, when the display mode of the hold display is displayed in a special mode, the frequency of execution of the suggestive effect can be increased, and thus the player's expectation can be increased.

  In the above description, the active display change effect for the active display has been described, but the hold change effect, which is the same effect mode as the active display change effect, is executed for the hold display displayed in the starting prize winning memory display area 5H. You may.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, after the hold display is displayed in the special mode, the common effect described above is executed as a suggestive effect that suggests a successful effect and a failure effect, so that the execution ratios are different, for example, , May be higher, or after the hold display is displayed in a special mode, suggestive effect suggesting an active display change effect with respect to the active display corresponding to the hold display (for example, common in success effect and failure effect. For example, the suggestion effect suggesting the common effect to be executed may be increased such that the execution ratios of executing the same effect or different modes are different. In addition, when the display mode of the hold display displayed in the starting prize winning memory display area 5H as shown in FIGS. 41 and 42 is the special mode, the active display change effect is displayed with respect to the hold display displayed in the special mode. For example, the execution ratio of executing the pending change effect executed in the same or different effect mode may be different, for example, higher.

  In the above description, the main notice effect such as the active display change effect is explained. However, if the main notice effect is not affected, another notice effect such as the main notice effect or the pre-read notice effect is executed with the same change. Alternatively, the main notice effect may be executed with the same variation if it does not affect the notice effect such as other main notice effect or prefetch notice effect. Here, when there is no effect, when the plurality of notice effects (main notice effect, pre-read notice effect) are executed in the change, the execution time for executing each notice effect is sufficient in the special figure change time of the change. Or when a plurality of notice effects (main notice effect, pre-read notice effect) are executed in the variation, it is difficult for the player to see due to the effect mode of each notice effect.

  In the above description, the active display change effect for the active display has been described. It is a decorative pattern when the display mode of the hold display is changed or when the decorative pattern is composed of a total of 9 types of eight types of alphanumeric characters "1" to "8" and one character image. It may be a production mode in which the character pops out of the character image and the action production is performed on the hold display of the target.

  In the above description, the display mode at the time of addition of the hold display has been described. However, in the case of determining whether to change the display mode of the hold display displayed in the display mode at the time of addition and changing the display mode of the hold display. 26 or 41, the display mode of the hold display may be determined based on the setting example of the display mode determination table of the hold display as shown in FIG. 41, and the timing of changing the display mode of the hold display may be determined. The timing of changing the display mode of the hold display may be a predetermined timing such as the next change.

  In the above description, as the first system change effect, an effect mode in which the display mode of the active display is changed by a figure group configured by a combination of a plurality of figures, and as the second system change effect, the display mode of the active display frame by the arrow However, it is not limited to a figure or an arrow. For example, a presentation mode in which a character or the like appears to change the display mode of the special image including the active display and the active display frame, etc. Good.

  Note that, in the above description, an example in which the display mode of the additionally displayed hold display (display mode at the time of addition) is white has been described, but as in the setting example by the hold display mode determination table as shown in FIGS. In addition, for example, the display mode of the hold display is determined so that it is additionally displayed in any of four colors (eg, red, yellow, blue, white) or five colors (eg, red, yellow, blue, white, gray). Alternatively, the display mode of the hold display may be determined so as to be additionally displayed by the display mode of 3 colors or less or 6 colors or more, or the color of the hold display or the display mode of the hold display. The display mode of the hold display may be determined to be additionally displayed by letters or symbols, or the hold display may be additionally displayed depending on the shape of the hold display (for example, heart shape, star shape, character type, etc.). The display mode may be determined, or the display mode of the hold display may be determined so as to be additionally displayed by the movement of the hold display (for example, the motion pattern of the character in the character-type hold display).

  In the above description, the active display may be erased from the image display device 5 immediately before the final stop of the decorative design, or the active display may be erased when the variation of the decorative design in the decorative design display area 5L is stopped. Alternatively, the active display may be erased after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation.

  In the above description, after the common effect is performed on the active display displayed in the active display area AHA, the success of changing the display mode of the special image including the active display corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the variable display is successful. An example of executing the failure effect that does not change the display mode of the special image including the active display corresponding to the effect and the hold display corresponding to the variable display has been described, but among the hold displays displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H. For either of the above, after performing the common effect that is commonly executed in the success effect and the failure effect, the success effect that changes the display mode of the hold display and the failure effect that does not change the display mode of the hold display are executed. You may.

  In addition, after performing a success effect or a failure effect on any of the hold displays displayed in the starting winning prize memory display area 5H, the hold display becomes the variable display, and the hold display corresponding to the variable display is performed. A success effect or a failure effect may be further performed on the special image including the active display. In this case, for example, when there is a starting winning prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, in step 160 or step 163 in FIG. 25, each of the hold displays displayed in the starting winning memory display area 5H is displayed. On the other hand, the success/failure effect execution/non-execution for the hold display, the effect mode, the execution timing for executing the effect, the display mode of the hold display, etc. are determined according to the variation category, and the active display corresponding to each hold display is determined. When the special image showing the information including the active display, the success/failure effect is executed, the effect mode, the display mode of the special display are determined according to the variation category and the like, as shown in FIG. The determination content may be stored in the first prefetching notice buffer 194C and the second prefetching notice buffer 194D.

  In the above description, as an example, the second system change effect of the effect mode by the arrow Y2 in which the character “intense heat” is drawn has been described, but the character may not be drawn in the arrow Y2, and other Characters may be drawn, characters, etc. may be drawn. In addition, when there are a plurality of types of effect forms as the second system change effect, the success effect is determined depending on which of the second system change effects the effect mode of the plurality of types of second system change effects is selected. The degree of expectation of execution may be different. In addition, the second system change effect may be an effect that suggests a display mode of the special image after the successful effect execution by the effect mode of the second system change effect.

  Further, for example, when the display mode of the active display displayed in the active display area AHA is the special mode, the hold change effect is executed for any of the hold displays displayed in the starting winning prize memory display area 5H. Alternatively, if any of the hold displays displayed in the starting prize winning memory display area 5H includes a hold display that is displayed in a special manner, one of the hold displays displayed in the starting winning prize memory display area 5H, or The hold change effect or the active display change effect may be executed for the active display.

  For example, either the first system change effect or the second system change effect may be an effect that changes the color of the active display in the display mode of the active display. In this case, for example, like the first system change effect that changes the shape and the second system change effect that changes the thickness of the line of the active display frame, it is displayed in the hold display displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H. The display mode of the active display so that the display mode is a color having a higher expectation of a big hit than the color of the hold display (for example, yellow or red in the case of the hold display displayed in blue) You can change the color in.

  For example, the active display color included in the special image displayed in the active display area AHA has different expectations for the success effect, for example, each of the active display colors shown in FIGS. A setting example of the determination rate of the effect mode set as in (C) may be used, or the success effect for the active display is executed by the color of the active display included in the special image displayed in the active display area AHA. It is also possible to use a setting example of the determination rate of the display mode in which the determination rate of the display mode of the active display such as the color of the active display after the setting is different.

  For example, in the example of setting the determination rate by the active display change effect execution presence/absence determination table in FIG. 29, 45%, such as the ratio of “execution” and “no execution” of the active display change effect of the variation pattern “PA4-X”. (1% system change effect 15%, 2nd system change effect 10%, 1st system change effect and 20% 2nd system effect change) A ratio may be set for each, and as in the variation pattern “PA1-X” in FIG. 29, the ratio of “execution performed” and “execution not performed” is 0% to 100%. The proportion according to the form may be set such that any one of the plurality is set as 0%.

  For example, in the probability variation control, a specific area may be provided in advance in the special winning opening, and the gaming machine may be controlled to the probability variation state based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific area. For example, based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, by being assigned to a plurality of types of jackpot types such as "non-probable variation", "probable variation", and "probability", the game ball enters a specific area within the special winning opening. It may be a gaming machine that controls the gaming state to an easy one and controls the gaming ball to a probability changing state based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through this specific area.

  In the above-described embodiment, the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B controlled by the main board 11 are provided on the right side of the game area of the game board 2 as shown in FIG. The hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B may be provided at the positions shown in FIG. 44, for example. As shown in FIG. 44, a guide rail 10 that surrounds the game area of the game board 2 is provided. The guide rail 10 has an inner rail 10a and an outer rail 10b. A game ball shot from a predetermined ball-striking launcher passes through a passage formed between the inner rail 10a and the outer rail 10b while being guided by the inner rail 10a and the outer rail 10b, and enters the game area. Becomes The first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B shown in FIG. 44 are arranged outside the outer rail 10b of the guide rail 10. Further, the first hold indicator 51A and the second hold indicator 51B controlled by the effect control board 12 are arranged inside the inner rail 10a of the guide rail 10. In this way, the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B controlled by the main board 11 and the first hold indicator 51A and the second hold indicator 51B controlled by the effect control board 12 are arranged. Therefore, the distance between the image display device 5 and the first hold indicator 51A and the second hold indicator 51B is between the image display device 5 and the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B. It is shorter than the distance. Therefore, it becomes easy to grasp the pending storage. As shown in FIG. 44, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B may also be arranged outside the outer rail 10b of the guide rail 10, or the first special symbol display device. 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B may be arranged inside the inner rail 10a of the guide rail 10.

  In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the number of LEDs constituting the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B controlled by the main board 11 is four, and the effect control board 12 controls the number of LEDs. The number of LEDs constituting each of the first hold indicator 51A and the second hold indicator 51B to be controlled is four. However, the number of LEDs constituting the hold indicator is not limited to four. For example, as shown in FIG. 45, the number of LEDs forming the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B is two, and the first hold indicator 51A and the second hold indicator 51B are formed. The number of LEDs may be two each. Note that the two LEDs that make up the first hold indicator 25A are LEDs 25Aa and 25Ab, and the two LEDs that make up the second hold indicator 25B are LEDs 25Ba and LED25Bb. Moreover, let the two LEDs which comprise the 1st reservation indicator 51A be LED51Aa and LED51Ab, and let the two LEDs which comprise the 2nd reservation indicator 51B be LED51Ba and LED51Bb.

  FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a light emitting example of the hold indicator, blinking timing, and the like when the number of LEDs constituting the hold indicator is two. "Hold 0" shown in FIG. 46(A) indicates that the special figure pending storage number (first special figure pending storage number or second special figure pending storage number) is 0, and "pending 1" indicates It indicates that the figure reserve storage number (the first special figure reserve storage number or the second special figure reserve storage number) is 1, and "hold 3" is the special figure reserve storage number (first special figure reserve storage number or 2 special figure reservation storage number) indicates 3, and "hold 4" indicates that the special figure reservation storage number (first special figure reservation storage number or second special figure reservation storage number) is 4. ..

  When the number of the 1st special figure reservation memory is 0 (when "reservation 0"), LED25Aa and LED25Ab of the 1st reservation indicator 25A are set as the light emission mode of the 1st reservation indicator 25A and the 1st reservation indicator 51A. , And the LEDs 51Aa and 51Ab of the first hold indicator 51A are turned off. In addition, turning off means that the LED is in an off state. Further, when the number of the second special figure reservation storages is 0 (when "reservation 0"), the LED 25Ba of the second reservation indicator 25B is set as the light emission mode of the second reservation indicator 25B and the second reservation indicator 51B. And the LED 25Bb, and the LEDs 51Ba and 51Bb of the second hold indicator 51B are turned off.

  When the number of the 1st special figure reservation storages is 1 (when it is "hold 1"), LED25Aa of the 1st reservation indicator 25A and the 1st reservation indicator 25A and the 1st reservation indicator 51A light emission mode. The LED 51Aa of the 1st hold indicator 51A is lit in red, and the LED 25Ab of the first hold indicator 25A and the LED 51Ab of the first hold indicator 51A are turned off. The lighting means that the LED is in an on state. In addition, when the number of the second special figure reservation storages is 1 (when "reservation 1"), the LED 25Ba of the second reservation indicator 25B is set as the light emission mode of the second reservation indicator 25B and the second reservation indicator 51B. The LED 51Ba of the second hold indicator 51B is lit in blue, and the LED 25Bb of the second hold indicator 25B and the LED 51Bb of the first hold indicator 51B are turned off. Note that the first hold indicators 25A, 51A and the second hold indicators 25B, 51B only differ in whether the emission color is red or blue. Therefore, in the following, the second hold indicators 25B, 51B. Will be omitted.

  When the number of the 1st special figure reservation storages is 2 (when it is "holding 2"), LED25Aa, 25Ab, 51Aa, 51Ab lights up in red as a light emission mode of 1st reservation indicator 25A, 51A. When the number of the 1st special figure reservation storages is 3 (when it is "holding 3"), LED25Aa, 51Aa blinks in red and LED25Ab, 51Ab as a light emission mode of 1st reservation indicator 25A, 51A. , Lights in red. In addition, blinking means that the LED is repeatedly turned on and off in a predetermined cycle. When the number of the 1st special figure reservation storages is 4 (when it is "holding 4"), LED25Aa, 25Ab, 51Aa, 51Ab blinks in red as a light emission mode of 1st reservation display 25A, 51A.

  The blinking cycle (the blinking cycle) of the LEDs 25Aa and 25Ab of the first hold indicator 25A and the blinking cycle of the LEDs 51Aa and 51Ab of the first hold indicator 51A may be the same or different. Good. FIG. 46(B) shows the blinking timing of the hold indicator when the blinking period is different. As shown in FIG. 46(B), the blinking cycle of the first hold indicator 25A (blinking cycle of the LEDs 25Aa, 25Ab) is T1, and the blinking cycle of the first hold indicator 51A (blinking of the LEDs 51Aa, 51Ab). The cycle) is T2. Here, as an example, the blinking cycle T2 is longer than the blinking cycle T1. The blinking cycle T1 may be longer than the blinking cycle T2. In order to make the blinking cycle T1 of the first hold indicator 25A and the blinking cycle T2 of the first hold indicator 51A different, for example, the blink cycle T1 is set by using the control clock of the main board 11 and blinks. The period T2 may be set using the control clock of the effect control board 12. Since the fourth symbol display device 51D and the like are controlled by the effect control board 12, the blinking cycle of the fourth symbol display device 51D and the like may be combined with the blinking period of the first hold display device 51A and the like. In this way, the blinking cycle T1 is set by using the control clock of the main board 11, the blinking cycle T2 is set by using the control clock of the effect control board 12, and the first hold indicator 25A and the first hold display are set. The blinking cycle of the device 51A may be different from each other. As a result, the main board 11 that controls the first hold display 25A and the like, and the effect control board 12 that controls the first hold display 51A and the like can perform blinking control while maintaining their control clocks. Can be suppressed.

  Further, when blinking a plurality of LEDs that form the first hold indicator 51A and the second hold indicator 51B controlled by the effect control board 12, the blinking of the plurality of LEDs may be synchronized. FIG. 47 shows the blinking timing of each LED when synchronizing the blinking of a plurality of LEDs. The timing at which the game ball passes through the first start winning opening and the timing at which the game ball passes through the second starting winning opening are different. As shown in FIG. 47, at timing t1, the first start condition is established based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first start winning opening, and the third hold (hold 3) for the first special figure game is held. Occur. The LED 51Aa is on until the timing t1, and starts blinking at the timing t1. At timing t2, the second starting condition is established based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the second starting winning opening, and the third hold (hold 3) is generated for the second special figure game. The LED 51Ba starts blinking at a timing after the timing t2 and at a timing when the LED 51Aa is turned off. That is, the LED 51Ba blinks in synchronization with the blinking of the LED 51Aa.

  Subsequently, at timing t3, the first starting condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first starting winning opening, and the fourth hold (hold 4) is generated for the first special figure game. The LED 51Ab starts blinking at a timing after the timing t3 and at a timing when the LED 51Aa is turned off. That is, the LED 51Ab blinks in synchronization with the blinking of the LED 51Aa. At timing t4, the second starting condition is established based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the second starting winning opening, and the fourth hold (holding 4) for the second special figure game occurs. The LED 51Bb starts blinking at a timing after the timing t4 and at a timing when the LED 51Aa is turned off. That is, the LED 51Bb blinks in synchronization with the blinking of the LED 51Aa. As a result, the LEDs 51Aa and 51Ab of the first hold indicator 51A and the LEDs 51Ba and 51Bb of the second hold indicator 51B blink in synchronization with each other. In this way, when blinking the plurality of LEDs that form the first hold indicator 51A and the second hold indicator 51B controlled by the effect control board 12, the control load is suppressed by synchronizing the blinking of the plurality of LEDs. At the same time, the appearance can be improved. It should be noted that any of the LEDs 51Aa and 51Ab of the first hold indicator 51A and the LEDs 51Ba and 51Bb of the second hold indicator 51B may have different blinking cycles. However, when the blinking cycle of any of the LEDs 51Aa and 51Ab of the first hold indicator 51A and the LEDs 51Ba and 51Bb of the second hold indicator 51B is different, the LEDs of each hold indicator are visually irregular. Since the player is paying attention to the light emitting mode, it hinders the effect by the image display device 5 and the like. Therefore, by synchronizing the blinking of a plurality of LEDs, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the effect of the image display device 5 or the like.

  Moreover, when making LED which comprises 1st hold display 51A etc. which are controlled by effect control board 12, and 4th symbol display 51D (LED) etc. which are controlled by effect control board 12 blink, mutually. The blinking may be synchronized or may not be synchronized. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a blinking timing of the hold indicator and the fourth symbol indicator.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 48(A), when the variation (variable display) of the first special figure game starts at timing t1, the fourth symbol display device 51D starts blinking. The fourth symbol display device 51D is turned off until timing t1, and starts blinking after the blinking timer is cleared at timing t1. At timing t2, the first starting condition is established based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first starting winning opening, and the third hold (hold 3) for the first special figure game occurs. The LED 51Aa starts blinking at timing t2. The LED 51Aa is on until the timing t2, and the blinking of the LED 51Aa starts after the blinking timer is cleared at the timing t2. After timing t2, the blinking of the LED 51Aa and the blinking of the fourth symbol display device 51D are asynchronous. That is, at the timing t3 when the fourth hold (holding 4) occurs for the first special figure game, the timing t4 when the fluctuation of the first special figure game stops, and the timing t5 when the fluctuation of the first special figure game starts again. Also, the blinking of the LED 51Aa and the blinking of the fourth symbol display device 51D are not synchronized. In this way, when the LEDs composing the hold display device 51A and the fourth symbol display device 51D are blinked, by not synchronizing the blinking of each other, the control load on the production control board 12 can be suppressed. Further, since the LEDs constituting the hold indicator 51A and the like and the fourth symbol indicator 51D blink independently, the appearance can be improved.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 48(B), when the variation (variable display) of the first special figure game starts at timing t1, the fourth symbol display device 51D starts blinking. The fourth symbol display 51D is off until timing t1, and starts blinking after the blinking timer is cleared at timing t1. At timing t2, the first starting condition is established based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first starting winning opening, and the third hold (hold 3) for the first special figure game occurs. The LED 51Aa starts blinking at timing t2. The LED 51Aa is on until the timing t2, and the blinking of the LED 51Aa starts after the blinking timer is cleared at the timing t2. At the timing t3, the first starting condition is established based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first starting winning opening, and the fourth holding (holding 4) for the first special figure game occurs. At the timing t4 when the fluctuation of the special figure game stops, the blinking of the LED 51Aa and the blinking of the fourth symbol display 51D are not synchronized. When the fluctuation of the first special figure game starts again at the timing t5, the fourth symbol display device 51D starts blinking. Then, the LED 51Aa starts blinking again at the timing after the timing t5 and at the timing when the fourth symbol display device 51D is turned off. That is, the LED 51Aa blinks in synchronization with the blinking of the fourth symbol display device 51D. In this way, when the hold occurs during the fluctuation, it is not synchronized with the blinking of the fourth symbol display unit 51D, and even when the LED 51Aa starts blinking, at the timing when the next variation starts, the LED 51Aa The blinking of and the blinking of the fourth symbol display 51D may be synchronized. In this way, at the timing when the next variation starts, by synchronizing the blinking of the LED 51Aa and the blinking of the fourth symbol display device 51D, the control load on the production control board 12 can be suppressed, and the next variation You can improve the appearance after starting.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 48(C), when the variation (variable display) of the first special figure game starts at timing t1, the fourth symbol display device 51D starts blinking. The fourth symbol display device 51D is turned off until timing t1, and starts blinking after the blinking timer is cleared at timing t1. At timing t2, the first starting condition is established based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first starting winning opening, and the third hold (hold 3) for the first special figure game occurs. The LED 51Aa is a timing after the timing t2, and starts blinking in synchronization with the timing when the fourth symbol display device 51D is turned off. That is, the LED 51Aa blinks in synchronization with the blinking of the fourth symbol display device 51D. After the timing t2, the blinking of the LED 51Aa and the blinking of the fourth symbol display device 51D are synchronized. When the fluctuation stops and the fourth symbol display 51D is off, the LED 51Aa continues to blink, and when the fluctuation starts again and the fourth symbol display 51D starts blinking, It blinks in synchronization with the blinking of the fourth symbol display device 51D. In this way, the appearance can be improved by synchronizing the blinking of the hold indicator controlled by the effect control board 12 and the blinking of the fourth symbol indicator.

  Further, the blinking cycle of the LED 25Aa of the first hold display 25A and the blinking cycle of the fourth symbol display 51D may be different. For example, as shown in FIG. 48(D), the blinking cycle of the fourth symbol display device 51D is T3, and the blinking cycle of the LED 25Aa of the first hold display device 25A is T4. Here, as an example, the blinking cycle T4 is longer than the blinking cycle T3. The blinking cycle T3 may be longer than the blinking cycle T4. In order to make the blinking cycle T3 of the fourth symbol display device 51D and the blinking cycle T4 of the first hold display device 51A different, for example, using the control clock of the effect control board 12, The blinking periods T3 and T4 may be set so that the clock numbers are different. When set in this way, for example, when the variation (variable display) of the first special figure game starts at timing t1, the fourth symbol display device 51D starts blinking. At timing t2, the first starting condition is established based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first starting winning opening, and the third hold (hold 3) for the first special figure game occurs. The LED 51Aa starts blinking at timing t2. After the timing t2, the blinking of the LED 51Aa and the blinking of the fourth symbol display unit 51D are asynchronous because the blinking periods are different from each other. In this way, when the LEDs composing the hold display 51A and the like and the fourth symbol display 51D are made to blink, the control load on the production control board 12 is suppressed by making the blinking cycles different from each other and not synchronizing them. You can Further, since the LEDs constituting the hold indicator 51A and the like and the fourth symbol indicator 51D blink independently, each blinking can be easily recognized.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided as shown in FIG. 1, but instead of these, for example, a normal winning ball device 60 shown in FIG. 49 may be provided. Good. For example, the normal winning ball device 60 is provided below the center of the image display device 5. The normal winning ball device 60 forms an entrance passage that is always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. Below the entrance passage, a distribution member 60C for distributing the game balls to the left and right is provided. The distribution member 60C may be configured so as to alternately distribute the game balls flowing down the entry passage, for example, left and right. The first start winning opening 60A is provided on the lower left of the distribution member 60C. A second start winning opening 60B is provided on the lower right of the distribution member 60C. As described above, the first start winning opening 60A and the second starting winning opening 60B are provided inside the normal winning ball device 60.

  In addition, inside the normal winning ball device 60, above the first starting winning port 60A, a first out port for discharging the game ball from the ordinary winning ball device 60 without entering the first starting winning port 60A is provided. It may be. In addition, inside the normal winning ball device 60, above the second starting winning port 60B, a second out port for discharging the game ball from the ordinary winning ball device 60 without entering the second starting winning port 60B is provided. It may be. However, neither the first out opening nor the second out opening has a ball receiving member, etc., and the game ball falling toward the first starting winning opening 60A or the second starting winning opening 60B is the first out. It suffices that the probability of entering the mouth or the second out mouth is formed to be sufficiently lower than the probability of not entering. Although not shown in FIG. 49, a configuration corresponding to the variable winning ball device 6B shown in FIG. 1 may be separately provided in the configuration of FIG.

  In such a pachinko gaming machine 1, the variable display is suspended because the game ball has entered (start winning) the first starting winning opening 60A and the second starting winning opening 60B provided inside the normal winning ball device 60. It should be generated based on For example, when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening 60A, the first starting winning occurs, and the starting condition of the special drawing game using the first special drawing by the first special symbol display device 4A (first starting) Condition) is satisfied, if the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not established, the first special figure hold storage number is One is added (incremented), and execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. In addition, due to the occurrence of the second start winning that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening 60B, the starting condition of the special drawing game using the second special drawing by the second special symbol display device 4B (second starting) Condition) is satisfied, if the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second starting condition is not established, the second special figure hold storage number is One is added (incremented), and execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended.

  In this way, the game balls that have flowed down the entrance passage are alternately distributed to the left and right by the distribution member 60C, and are alternately reserved for the first special figure game and the second special figure game, so the maximum number of reservations is eight. It is easy to become. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the first starting prize memory display area 5HL and the second starting winning memory display area 5HR are not provided, and the same hold display is started for the first special figure game and the second special figure game. When it is performed in the winning memory display area, it is possible to easily grasp (confirm) the number of each reserved memory.

  In the above embodiment, only the fourth symbol display which blinks when the special figure game is executed is provided, but further, the fourth symbol display which blinks when the general figure game is executed is provided. May be. Further, as the hold indicator controlled by the effect control board 12, only the hold indicator for performing the hold display for the special figure game is provided, but the hold indicator for performing the hold display for the general figure game is further provided. May be provided. FIG. 50 is a hold display in the case of providing a fourth symbol display device 51F that blinks when the general-purpose game is being executed, and a general-use holding display device 51G for performing a holding display for the general-purpose game. The example of arrangement of the container and the 4th symbol indicator is shown.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 50(A), the LEDs 51Ga to 51Gd of the universal figure holding display device 51G are arranged on the display substrate 51K, and the fourth symbol display device 51F is also arranged on the display substrate 51K. Good. Further, as shown in FIG. 50(B), a display substrate 51J is provided in addition to the display substrate 51K, and the LEDs 51Ga to 51Gd of the universal figure reservation display 51G are arranged on the display substrate 51J and The symbol display device 51F may also be arranged on the display substrate 51J. The other electric parts are the same as those in the above-mentioned embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted. In this way, the universal figure reservation display 51G and the fourth pattern display 51F are arranged and integrated in common electric parts such as one display board 51K and display board 51J, thereby reducing the production cost. be able to. Further, since the universal figure hold display 51G and the fourth symbol display 51F can be checked collectively, the display on each display can be easily grasped.

  In the above embodiment, the first hold indicator 51A, the second hold indicator 51B, the fourth symbol indicator 51D and the fourth symbol indicator 51E are arranged as shown in FIG. 2B, but FIG. Arrangement different from the arrangement as shown in (B), for example, may be arranged as shown in the arrangement example of the hold indicator and the fourth symbol indicator in FIG. Further, for example, the first hold indicator 51A is arranged on the left side of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front, and the second hold display device 51B is arranged on the right side of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front. The two hold indicators 51B may be spaced from each other.

  In the arrangement example of the reservation display device and the fourth design display device shown in FIG. 51(A), the fourth design display device 51D and the LEDs 51Aa to 51Ad of the first reservation display device 51A are vertically aligned. In addition, the fourth symbol display 51E and the LEDs 51Ba to 51Bd of the second hold display 51B are vertically aligned. In this way, the hold indicator and the fourth symbol indicator relating to the same special drawing game may be arranged in a line. As a result, the holding display device and the fourth symbol display device relating to the same special drawing game can be collectively confirmed, so that the display on each display device can be easily grasped. Incidentally, in addition to arranging the hold indicator and the fourth symbol display in a single vertical column, one row in the horizontal direction, one diagonal line, or next to each other, the reserve indicator and the fourth symbol display are close to each other (one vertical column). Or in a horizontal row, a diagonal row, or adjacent to each other), it is possible to collectively confirm the hold indicator and the fourth symbol indicator, so that it is easy to grasp the display on each indicator.

  In the arrangement example of the reservation display device and the fourth design display device shown in FIG. 51(B), the fourth design display device 51D and the LEDs 51Aa and 51Ab of the first reservation display device 51A are vertically aligned. The fourth symbol display device 51E and the LEDs 51Ba and 51Bb of the second hold display device 51B are vertically aligned. In this example, the light emission mode of the hold indicator is the same as that in the case where the number of LEDs constituting the hold indicator shown in FIG. 46 is two. Further, the fourth symbol display unit 51D and the fourth symbol display unit 51E are arranged in a horizontal row, and the first reserved display unit 51A and the second reserved display unit 51B are arranged in a horizontal row. As a result, since the fourth symbol display devices relating to different special figure games can be collectively checked, it is easy to understand the display on each display device. In addition, since it is possible to collectively confirm the pending display devices relating to different special figure games, it is easy to grasp the display on each display device. Even in this case, the hold indicator and the fourth symbol indicator for the same special figure game can be collectively confirmed.

  In the arrangement example of the hold display device and the fourth design display device shown in FIG. 51(C), the fourth design display device 51D and the fourth design display device 51E are vertically aligned. The LEDs 51Aa and 51Ab of the first hold indicator 51A and the LEDs 51Ba and 51Bb of the second hold indicator 51B are vertically aligned. Also in this example, the light emitting mode of the hold indicator is the same as the case where the number of LEDs constituting the hold indicator shown in FIG. 46 is two. Further, the fourth symbol display device 51D and the first reserved display device 51A are in a horizontal row, and the fourth symbol display device 51E and the second reserved display device 51B are in a horizontal row. As a result, since the fourth symbol display devices relating to different special figure games can be collectively checked, it is easy to understand the display on each display device. In addition, since it is possible to collectively confirm the pending display devices relating to different special figure games, it is easy to grasp the display on each display device. Even in this case, the hold indicator and the fourth symbol indicator for the same special figure game can be collectively confirmed.

  In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the number of LEDs constituting the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B controlled by the main board 11 is four, and the effect control board 12 controls the number of LEDs. The number of LEDs constituting each of the first hold indicator 51A and the second hold indicator 51B to be controlled is four. Further, as a modification, as shown in FIG. 45, the number of LEDs constituting each of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B is two, and the first hold indicator 51A and the second hold indicator are The number of LEDs making up 51B was two. In addition, for example, the number of LEDs constituting the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B is set to one or three, respectively, and the first hold indicator 51A and the second hold indicator 51B are configured. The number of LEDs used may be one or three, respectively.

  When each display has only one LED, as the light emission mode of the hold display, for example, when the number of hold storage is 0, the LED is turned off, when the number of hold storage is 1, the LED is turned on in blue, and the hold storage is When the number is 2, the LED may blink in blue, when the number of pending storage is 3, the LED may be turned on in red, and when the number of pending storage is 4, the LED may blink in red. Further, as the light emission mode of the hold indicator, for example, it may be lit or blinked in a color other than blue and red, or may be a light emission mode including blue and red and colors other than these colors. As an example of a light emission mode including blue and red and a color other than these colors, when the number of reserved memories is 0, the LED is turned off, when the number of reserved memories is 1, the LED is turned on in blue, and the number of reserved memories is 2. The LED may be turned on in yellow when the number is 3, the LED is turned on in red when the number of retained memories is 3, and the LED may be illuminated in purple when the number of retained memories is 4.

  When the number of LEDs in each display is three, for example, as the light emission mode of the pending display, when the number of pending storage is 0, three LEDs are turned off, and when the number of pending storage is 1, the first LED is turned on. When the number of reserved memories is 2, the second LED is further lit in blue when the number of reserved memories is 2, and when the number of reserved memories is 3, the third LED is further lit in blue and the number of reserved memories is 4 At this time, the three LEDs may blink in blue. In addition to controlling the number of LEDs to be turned on to increase from 1 to 3 each time the number of reserved memories increases from 1 to 3, the number of LEDs to be turned on each time the number of reserved memories increases. You may control so that the place of is changing. When the number of reserved memories is 1, the first LED is lit in blue, when the number of reserved memories is 2, the second LED is further lit in yellow, and when the number of reserved memories is 3, it is further 3 Alternatively, the third LED may be turned on in red, and when the number of stored memories is 4, all three LEDs may be switched to white.

  In this way, by setting the number of LEDs forming the hold display controlled by the main board 11 and the number of LEDs forming the hold display controlled by the production control board 12 to be the same, the main board The hold display on the hold display controlled by 11 and the hold display on the hold display controlled by the production control board 12 are related to each other, and the number of held memories can be easily grasped (confirmed).

  In addition, a hold indicator (first hold indicator 25A, second hold indicator 25B) controlled by the main board 11 and a hold indicator (first hold indicator 51A, second hold) controlled by the effect control board 12 The display sizes of the hold display in the display 51B) may be different from each other. For example, the display size of the hold display on the hold display controlled by the effect control board 12 may be larger than the display size of the hold display on the hold display controlled by the main board 11. This makes it easy to grasp (confirm) the number of reserved memories. Further, the display size of the hold display on the hold display controlled by the effect control board 12 may be smaller than the display size of the hold display on the hold display controlled by the main board 11. This saves space and improves the flexibility of board design.

  Further, for example, when the power is restored after a power failure or the like (power interruption), the hold display in the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL and the second starting winning prize memory display area 5HR of the image display device 5, and the effect control board 12 are displayed. You may adjust the display timing with the hold display in the hold display (1st hold display 51A, 2nd hold display 51B) controlled by. The adjustment of the display timing may be performed by the display control unit 123 or the effect control CPU 120. For example, when the power is restored after a power failure or the like (power interruption), the hold display on the hold display controlled by the effect control board 12 is displayed as the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL and the second starting winning prize memory display area 5HR. You may go ahead of the hold display in. By adjusting the display timing in this way, the pending display can be recognized earlier, and the number of pending storages can be easily grasped (confirmed).

  Further, for example, when the power is restored after a power failure or the like (power failure), the hold display on the hold display controlled by the effect control board 12, the first start winning prize memory display area 5HL, and the second starting prize winning memory display. The hold display in the area 5HR may be performed at the same time. By adjusting the display timing in this way, it is not necessary to send a command different from the command after the command corresponding to the power failure recovery, so that it is possible to prevent the control load from increasing.

  In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the emission color of the first hold indicator 25A and the emission color of the second hold indicator 25B are made different, and the emission color of the first hold indicator 51A and the second hold indicator are changed. The emission color of the display 51B was made different, and the emission color of the fourth symbol display 51D and the emission color of the fourth symbol display 51E were made different. However, these emission colors may be the same color. For example, the emission color of the first hold display 25A, the emission color of the second hold display 25B, the emission color of the first hold display 51A, the emission color of the second hold display 51B, the emission of the fourth symbol display 51D. All or part of the color and the light emission color of the fourth pattern display device 51E may be the same color. With this configuration, the LEDs constituting each display can be configured by single-color LEDs of the same color, which can reduce the production cost and the control load.

  In the above-described embodiment, as the hold display controlled by the effect control board 12, the first hold display 51A and the second hold display 51B including, for example, four LEDs are used. The hold indicator controlled by 12 is not limited to one that includes four LEDs. For example, a sub-image display device may be provided outside the image display device 5 instead of the first hold display device 51A and the second hold display device 51B. In this case, in the sub-image display device, the same hold display as the hold display in the first start prize winning memory display area 5HL and the second start prize memory display area 5HR of the image display device 5 may be displayed by image display. This sub-image display device is a light-transmissive display device that is arranged on the front side (player side) of the image display device 5 and that allows light emission effects and the like from the back side such as a transmissive liquid crystal to be visually recognized. You may.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, "the ratio of executing the successful effect is different", for example, in the case of making various kinds of decisions, the ratio of any one of the plurality of decision results is the other decision. The higher than the result ratio may include that the ratio of 1 is 100%, and that the ratio of other determination is 0%. You may. When the ratio of 1 is 100%, the ratio of other determinations is 0%. Further, when the rate of the other determination result is 0%, the rate of the 1 determination result is a predetermined rate other than 100% but not 0%. In this case, the ratio (predetermined ratio) of 1 determination result is higher than the ratio (0%) of other determination results.

  In the above-described embodiment, the main board 11 determines whether or not it is a “big hit”, such as executing the winning random number determination processing in the start winning determination processing executed on the main board 11. I do. And the command which designates the said decision result is transmitted to the production control board 12. Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, the execution of the pre-reading notice is determined based on the command from the main board 11. However, the main board 11 is not limited to the one that determines whether or not a “big hit” occurs. For example, the main board 11 side transmits a command indicating the random number value extracted at the time of winning to the effect control board 12, and the effect control board 12 side is a "big hit" based on the command from the main board 11. Whether or not the pre-reading notice may be executed may be determined according to the result of the determination. That is, in determining the execution of the pre-reading notice, the determination process regarding the target of the pre-reading notice may be executed by either the main board 11 or the effect control board 12.

  Other than that, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the process shown in the flowchart, various performance operations including the performance image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5 depart from the spirit of the present invention. Changes and modifications are possible within the range not specified.

  For example, by using a frequency that is a game value of a size specified by the recorded information of a game recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card, a game score for use in a game is given and the given game is given. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by hitting a game ball enclosed in the gaming machine into a game area by using a score or a game score given by a prize for a game.

  That is, based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the starting area provided in the game area, a variable display means is provided for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified, and deriving and displaying the display result. This is a gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed on the display means. However, when the gaming score is not 0, the gaming score is used in the gaming machine. A game is played by hitting the game ball enclosed in the game area, the game score is subtracted according to the hitting of the game ball, and the game score is awarded when the game ball wins the prize area provided in the game area. The present invention can be applied to a gaming machine that adds. Such a game machine has a game recording medium insertion slot for inserting a game recording medium in which information capable of specifying the magnitude of the game value that can be used for adding game points is recorded, and a game recording medium. It may be provided with a game recording medium processing means for reading the record information recorded in the game recording medium inserted in the medium insertion slot.

  The special design and the decorative design are not limited to those variably displayed as a plurality of types of identification information. For example, the special symbol display device (the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B) is configured by using a plurality of LEDs, during the variable display of the special symbol, specified among the plurality of LEDs ( Only the single LED is repeatedly turned on and off, and the other LEDs are kept turned off. Then, when the variable display result is “miss”, by keeping the LED that repeatedly turned on and off emits light with a predetermined emission color, or by keeping the light off, the special symbol is displayed. Stop display. At this time, the other LEDs remain off. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the special symbol is stopped and displayed by a predetermined lighting pattern in which some or all of the LEDs are lit. As described above, while the special symbol and the decorative symbol are variably displayed, the specific (single) symbol is switched between the display and the non-display, while the other symbols are kept in the non-display state. Good. Then, as the final stop design (fixed special design or fixed decorative design) that is the variable display result of the special design or the decorative design, any one of a plurality of types of designs may be derived and displayed (stop display).

  Further, in the above description, in order to notify the effect control microcomputer (effect control CPU 120) of a change pattern indicating a change time and a change mode such as the type of reach effect and the presence/absence of pseudo-relation, 1 is set when the change is started. Although an example of transmitting one fluctuation pattern command is shown, the fluctuation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103) determines whether the first command indicates presence/absence of pseudo-relation, presence/absence of sliding effect, etc. before reaching (when not reaching). Command before the so-called second stop) is sent, and the second command indicates the type of reach and the presence/absence of re-lottery effect, etc. after reaching the reach (when the reach is not reached). May transmit a command indicating a change time or a change mode after the so-called second stop). In this case, the effect control microcomputer may perform effect control in variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of the two commands. It should be noted that the game control microcomputer 100 notifies the variation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer selects the specific variation mode executed at each timing. Good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined time has elapsed after sending the first command (for example, the next timer interrupt (In), the second command may be transmitted. It should be noted that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the transmission order can be changed as appropriate. By thus notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern command can be reduced.

  The program and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, and the computer device or the like in advance. It may be distributed by being pre-installed in the storage device included in. Further, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not limited to that executed by mounting a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in the internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the hardware resources of other devices may be directly used on the network connected via a communication line. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 5HL ... 1st start winning prize memory display area 5HR ... 2nd starting winning prize memory display area 5H ... Starting prize Memory display area 6A... Ordinary winning ball device 6B... Ordinary variable winning ball device 7... Special variable winning ball device 8 (8L, 8R)... Speaker 9... First lamp 11... Main board 12... Production control board 13... Voice control board 14... 1st lamp control board 15, 19... Relay board 16... Display drive part 17... 2nd lamp drive part 18... Accessory drive part 20... Ordinary pattern display 21... Gate switch 22A... 1st starting opening switch 22B... 2nd starting opening switch 23... Count switch 31A... Stick controller 31B... Push button 51... Information display part 51A... 1st reservation display 51Aa-51Ad... LED
51B... 2nd reservation indicator 51Ba-51Bd... LED
51C... Character display 51D, 51E, 51F... 4th symbol display 51K, 51J... Display board 51G... Universal figure reservation display 52... 2nd lamp 53... Drive mechanism 54... Versa lighter 541... 3rd lamp drive part 545 ... LED group 545A ... LED
60... Ordinary winning ball device 60A... First starting winning opening 60B... Second starting winning opening 60C... Sorting member 100... Game control microcomputers 101, 121... ROM
102, 122... RAM
103... CPU
104, 124... Random number circuits 105, 125... I/O
120... CPU for production control
123... Display control unit AH... Active display AHW... Active display frame AHA... Active display area

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of executing variable display,
Image display means capable of displaying effects corresponding to variable display,
Correspondence display execution means capable of executing correspondence display corresponding to variable display,
Suggestion effect execution means capable of executing suggestion effect suggesting whether or not the display mode of the correspondence display changes,
Hold storage means capable of storing information on variable display that has not been started yet as hold information,
A predetermined hold display section which is provided in the image display means and which displays the hold information stored in the hold storage means;
A special hold display section which is provided outside the image display means and which displays the hold information stored in the hold storage means;
Equipped with
The execution mode of the correspondence display includes a normal mode, a special mode different from the normal mode, and a first special mode and a second special mode that are modes different from the normal mode and the special mode,
The correspondence display execution means can execute correspondence display at a plurality of timings by changing the correspondence display to the first special mode or the second special mode in a predetermined area of the image display means ,
The display mode of the predetermined area includes a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode,
When the display mode of the predetermined area is the first mode and when the display mode of the predetermined area is the second mode, the ratio of executing the suggestive effect is different,
The suggestion effect executing means, when the correspondence display is executed in the special mode, executes the suggestion effect more frequently than when the correspondence display is not executed in the special mode,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped and restarted, the display on the special hold display section is started earlier than the display on the predetermined hold display section,
A gaming machine characterized by that.